Home

FrameSaver FLEX 9123 User's Guide - 9123-A2-GB20-00

1. DCE Receive Data RXD DCE Request To Send RTS DCE Clear To Send CTS To DTE Out b DCE Data Set Ready DSR From DTE In 6 Signal Ground GND 7 DCE Carrier Detect CD To DTE Out 8 DCE Data Terminal Ready DTR From DTE In 20 Pins 5 6 and 8 are tied together 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 C 3 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Standard EIA 232 D Crossover Cable A standard crossover cable can be used to connect the COM port to an external modem The external modem must be configured so it is compatible with the FrameSaver unit See page C 5 to configure an external modem P1 Plug Chassis Ground TXD RXD RTS Chassis Ground TXD RXD RTS DSR Signal Ground CD RLSD DSR Signal Ground CD RLSD CO NO Of W N CO N Oa OF W N 496 15180 C 4 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments B gt Procedure To configure an external modem 1 Disconnect the asynchronous terminal from the standard cable See page C 4 for an illustration of the COM Port connection 2 Reconnect the crossover cable to the external modem 3 Enable auto answer on your modem and configure it to use the following LSD DSR CTS RTS and DTR control leads See the table below for AT DO command strings Use the following command string AT amp CO amp D2 amp SO amp R1 DO S0 1 AT Command String To configure the modem to amp CO Force LSD on amp D
2. Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table if Table NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable m Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps Trap warmStart Trap authenticationFailure Traps linkUp and linkDown Traps enterprise Specific Traps RMON Specific RMON Alarm and Event Defaults Physical Interface Alarm Defaults Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area Object ID Cross References Numeric Order 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 B 1 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults MIB Support The FrameSaver unit supports the SNMP Version 1 and has the capability of being managed by any industry standard SNMP manager and accessed by external SNMP managers using the SNMP protocol The following MIBs are supported MIB II RFC 1213 and RFC 1573 Frame Relay DTEs MIB RFC 2115 RS 232 Like MIB RFC 1659 Frame Relay Service MIB RFC 1604 Enterprise MIB RMON Version 1 MIB RFC 1757 RMON Version 2 MIB RFC 2021 Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps Paradyne standard and enterprise MIBs are available from the Paradyne World Wide Web site B Procedure To access Paradyne MIBs 1 2 3 Access the Paradyne World Wide Web site at www paradyne com Select Technical Support Select Management Information Base MIBs The download procedure may vary depending upon your browser or NMS application software Refer to yo
3. About Trend Reports Printed Reports Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices By specifying specific variables like bandwidth trend analysis can be performed and shown on Trend Reports Up to ten variables for a DLCI or ten DLC Is on one variable can be generated on a single trend report Information can be presented in a line graph pie chart bar chart or table format Any amount of time can be specified for the reporting period These reports can help identify the reasons a DLCI has acquired a poor Health Index rating See the Exceptions Report for information about Health Index ratings All of the charts and tables seen online can also be provided on printed reports Reports Applicable to FLEX and SLV Devices The following frame relay reports support FrameSaver FLEX units 9123 A2 GB20 00 Exception Reports Provide summary and detail information that identifies DLCls with the highest incidence of errors high bandwidth utilization and trends These reports identify those DLCls that have exceeded a specified number of accumulated exception points It is a good idea to run this report daily so that DLCls having the most problems can be attended to first DLCIs contained on this report need immediate attention If a DLCI suddenly shows up on these reports check whether any new equipment has been added to the network and whether it is properly configured If its configuration is correct the equipment could be f
4. Available Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies the highest access level allowed when accessing the unit via a Telnet or FTP session when the service provider is using the TS Access Management Link Display Conditions This option only appears when m Service Type on the Easy Install screen is set to Frame Relay m TS Access Management Link is set to None NOTES Telnet and FTP sessions on this link are not affected by the access level set by the Session Access Level Login Required or FTP Login Required option settings see Table 3 12 Telnet and FTP Session Options Telnet and FTP sessions on this link are affected by the Telnet Session Inactivity Timeout Disconnect Time and FTP Session option settings Level 1 Allows Telnet or FTP access by network service providers with the capability to view unit information change configuration options and run tests This is the highest access level allowed Use this setting when downloading files Level 2 Allows Telnet or FTP access by network service providers with the capability to view unit information and run tests only they cannot change configuration options Level 3 Allows Telnet access by network service providers with the capability to view unit information only they cannot change configuration options or run tests 3 44 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 9 Node IP Options 3 of 3 TS Access Available
5. Character Length Possible Settings 7 8 Default Setting 8 Specifies the number of bits needed to represent one character NOTE Character length defaults to 8 and cannot be changed if Port Use is set to Net Link 7 Sets the character length to seven bits 8 Sets the character length to eight bits Use this setting if using the COM port as the network communication link Possible Settings None Even Odd Default Setting None Provides a method of checking the accuracy of binary numbers for the COM port A parity bit is added to the data to make the 1 bits of each character add up to either an odd or even number Each character of transmitted data is approved as error free if the 1 bits add up to an odd or even number as specified by this configuration option None Provides no parity Even Makes the sum of all 1 bits and its corresponding parity bit always even Odd Makes the sum of all 1 bits and its corresponding parity bit always odd Possible Settings 1 2 Default Setting 1 Determines the number of stop bits used for the COM port 1 Provides one stop bit 2 Provides two stop bits Ignore Control Leads Possible Settings Disable DTR Default Setting Disable Specifies whether DTR is used Disable Treats control leads as standard operation DTR Ignores DTR This may be necessary when connecting to some PAD devices Login Required Possible Settings Enable D
6. Controlling SNMP Access The FrameSaver unit supports SNMP Version 1 which provides limited security through the use of community names There are three methods for limiting SNMP access Disabling SNMP access Assigning SNMP community names and the access type Assigning IP addresses of those NMSs that can access the unit Disabling SNMP Access 4 8 When the SNMP access is disabled the FrameSaver unit will not respond to SNMP messages B Procedure To disable SNMP access 1 Select the General SNMP Management options Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management 2 Disable the SNMP Management option 3 Save your change See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about General SNMP Management configuration options May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Security and Logins Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels The FrameSaver unit supports the SNMP protocol and can be managed by an SNMP manager SNMP manager access can be limited by Assigning the SNMP community names that are allowed to access the FrameSaver unit s Management Information Base MIB m Specifying the type of access allowed for each SNMP community name Whenever an SNMP manager attempts to access an object in the MIB the community name must be supplied B gt Procedure To assign SNMP community names and access types 1 Select the General S
7. ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh PgUp PgDn NextLink PrevLink An asterisk next to the DLCI indicates that the DLCI has been configured for the link 5 18 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 9123 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance DLCls without an asterisk have not been configured in the unit These DLCls pass through the unit transparently without being monitored and with no demultiplexing multiplexing of management diagnostics or user data being performed Only DLCls on the Net1 FR1 and Port 1 frame relay links appear on this screen nonconfigured DLCls on other links are discarded Table 5 9 Network LMI Reported DLCIs Status Field Status What It Indicates DLCI 16 through 1007 Identifies the Local Management Interface reported DLC numbers assigned to the selected interface the identifying number assigned to the path between two frame relay FrameSaver units ports DLCI statuses are listed in ascending order i e lowest number first Status LMI reported status of the DLCI Active m Whether the DLCI is active capable of carrying data in the frame relay network Inactive m Whether it is inactive in the frame relay network Deleted Whether it has been deleted by the frame relay network or New Whether it has been created by the frame relay network CIR bps 0 1536000 Displays the committed information rate reported by the Stratacom switch CIR information only appears
8. 3 43 Packet Size 3 21 suggestions user documentation A performance statistics summary network report Sample Interval secs 3 20 switching Synchronization Role between screen areas Timeout Error Event Threshold 3 20 21 to new software 5 43 SNMP System assigning community names access levels and test status messages limiting access configuring options Management displaying information NMS security options entering information Number of Managers 3 53 Frame Relay and LMI options 3 17 setting up Trap Managers General options 3 22 trap event log 5 39 6 11 last rest Traps 3 54 messages downloading Name Contact and Location standards setting the clock data amp time supported 6 software T changing 5 43 downloading 5 40 T1 revision NAM Canadian line interface cable Source Canadian network cable DLCI 3 40 LMI Heartbeat 3 19 3 35 EDLCI network cable Hal network interface and cable Spacebar network interface oponek 23 Standard out RIP T2 LMI Inbound Heartbeat 3 19 B 36 standards compliance for SNMP Traps T3 LMI N4 Measurement na 3 19 3 36 starting Tab key 2 a session Tc 3 38 a test TCP statistics Telnet elements limiting access selecting performance intervals for display Session uploading to an NMS 5 44 user interface options 3 50 Status Terminal Port Use 3 58 DLCI Test Enquiry LMI 3 18 8
9. NetOnly 3 12 NetScout Manager Plus NMS support NMS support Network assigning data port to time slots cable pin assignments Com Link Down 5 15 6 9 configuring the interface DLCI records options 3 37 Health Concord reports Initiated DCLB Initiated LLB Initiated PLB interface control leads interface LEDS interface options latency 1 7 reference time time slot assignments Network Health installation and setup NMS IP Address 3 53 B 54 4 10 IP Validation OpenLane management system SNMP security options Node IP Address 3 43 Subnet Mask Node IP configuration option tables NSP Number of Managers Trap Managers Q 35 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 O odd parity OID object identification user history file cross reference numeric order B 23 B 28 OK LED OOF LED linkDown trap OpenLane SLM support operation changing mode for demos organization of this document Out of Frame linkDown trap Out of Sync message Outbound Management Priority P packet capture uploading data utility 6 5 packets 3 47 Parity 3 59 pass through operation Password 4 11 patents A pattern send monitor interior tests 6 26 Payload Loopback 6 22 performance statistics 5 26 6 2 clearing 5 27 physical data port options network interface options tests 6 20 pin assignments COM port E
10. None appears if the FrameSaver unit has not communicated with the other end or if the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI does not have an IP Address configured Dropped SLV The number of SLV inband sample messages sent for which a Responses response from the far end device has not been received Inbound Dropped Total number of frames transmitted by the far end device that Frames were dropped in transit The counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached 232 2 then the count starts over The SLV Delivery Ratio option see Table 3 2 Service Level Verification Options must be enabled for these statistics to appear m Above CIR The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were above the committed information rate and were dropped in transit m Within CIR The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were within the committed information rate but were dropped in transit m Between CIR amp EIR m The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate and were dropped in transit Only appears for FrameSaver units when the SLV Delivery Ratio option is enabled May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 12 Service Level Verification Performance Statistics 2 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates m The number of frames transmitted by the far end device tha
11. Uses network timing received from incoming SLV communications and provides network based synchronization information to other devices in the network Controller Uses its own internal time of day clock and provides synchronization information to other devices in the network based upon its own clock NOTE Only one device in the network should be configured as the SLV synchronization controller None Incoming timing information is ignored and no timing information is sent out This setting should only be used when network synchronization is not desirable or when a single unit connects multiple networks or network segments 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 21 Configuration Configuring General System Options Select General from the System menu to configure the general system configuration options see Table 3 3 Main Menu Configuration System General Table 3 3 General System Options Test Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether or not loopback and pattern tests have a duration after which they are terminated automatically This setting does not effect DTE commanded tests or the LMI Packet Capture Utility feature Enable All Loopback and Pattern tests have a timeout This setting is recommended when the FrameSaver unit is managed remotely through an in band data stream If the FrameSaver unit is accidently commanded to execute a disruptive test on the interface
12. e Connectivity System e Frame Relay and LMI e Service Level Verification General A 2 Reported DLCls Status CIR bps Status System and Test Status LMI Reported DLCls PVC Connection Status Timeslot Assignment Status IP Routing Table Performance Statistics Trap Event Log Display LEDs and Control Leads Identity Timeslot Assignment Status e Network Timeslot Status PVC Connection Status e Source Link DLCI EDLCI e Primary Destination Link DLCI EDLCI Status PVC Tests Network Data Port Physical Tests Network Data Port Other IP Ping Lamp Test Abort All Tests Physical Tests Local Loopbacks e Remote Loopbacks e Send Monitor Pattern Tests Configuration Edit Display MAIN MENU SINUS Configuration Auto Configuration Control Easy Install Identity e System e NAM Trap Event Log e Number of Trap Events Time Elasped Since Event Event Load Configuration from MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Control Easy Install Performance Statistics e Service Level Verification e DLCI Frame Relay ESF Line Ethernet Clear All Statistics IP Routing Table Destination e Mask e Gateway e Hop Type Interface e TTL MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Network and Data Ports e Physical Frame Relay e DLCI Records System Network Data Ports
13. 001 001 HRERRERRERERERRE ESC for previous menu PVCMgmt 1001 PVCMgmt 1002 Ethernet COM COM Ethernet PVCMgmt 1003 PVCMgmt 1004 PVCMgmt 1005 PVCMgmt 1006 MainMenu Exit The table is sorted by the Destination IP address from the lowest number to the highest If no routes exist the No Routes message appears instead of routing information Table 5 11 Column Mask Gateway What It Indicates It Indicates a Destination IP Address for the route 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 The Destination Subnet Mask for the route IP Routing Table Values 1 of 2 m 000 000 000 000 225 255 255 255 for network routes FFF FFF FFF FFF for host routes m 127 may appear as well It is a reserved number The Gateway IP Address for the route 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 11 IP Routing Table Values 2 of 2 Column What It Indicates Hop The number of hops in the route to the destination 1 15 If 16 appears the route is in the process of being aged out Type The method used to add the route to the table RIP The route was discovered through Routing Information Protocol The route remains until its TTL Time to Live expires a better route is provided via RIP or there is a power reset Loc The route was added due to the FrameSaver unit s local configuration a Default IP Address or an SNMP Manager Initial Route D
14. 1 5 Rx Short Frames Rx Long Frames LMI Sequence Errors Tx Discards Rx Discards Rx Nonoctet Aligns Rx CRC Errors Rx Illegal Frames Tx Total Errors Rx Total Errors Rx Overruns Tx Underruns Total LMI Errors May 2000 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyLatest MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtFrameSzUpLimit MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtFrameSzCount MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxShort MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxLong MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkSeqErr MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTxDiscards MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxDiscards MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxCrcErrs MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxllFrames MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxOverruns MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkT xUnderruns MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLink TotalLMIErrs B 29 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults B 30 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments This appendix shows the FrameSaver unit s rear panel and the pin assignments for the connectors interfaces and cables Rear Panel The following illustration shows the FrameSaver 9123 unit s rear panel 00 16690 The se
15. 3 44 4 7 limiting Telnet access TST LED TIL TXD control lead 5 6 Type Access U UN1 3 18 3 19 3 35 3 36 upgrading system software uploading data user history adding files 8 10 installing files 8 12 monitoring DLCI 8 13 statistics gathering 1 6 1 7 user interface cannot be accessed external modem Com port options resetting restoring access Telnet session user defined history u May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Index Vv W V 35 warmStart connector events General Traps straight through cable trap V 54 Loopback 3 25 b 17 6 25 warranty A Value Out of Range message Web site variable bindings B 9 B 14 access to documentation VCI glossary viewing packet capture results virtual path or channel identifier Y vPI 1 5 Yellow Alarm B 9 Alarm Signal 5 4 5 5 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 IN 11
16. D Tx BECNs MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrCircuitTxBECN 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 1 D Tx Frames Above CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciTxFrOutCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 18 1 D Rx Frames Above CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciRxFrOutCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 20 1 D Network Frames Lost MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciNetDropFr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 22 1 D Rx DEs MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDIciRxDE 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 37 1 D Network Frames Offered MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciRmtOffFr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 39 1 D Network Frames Offered MIB pdn FrExt mib E cia Tag devFrExtDIciRmtOffFrInCir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 411 D Network Frames Dropped In CIR MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDliciDropOffFrinCir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 43 1 D Network Frames Offered Above CIR MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciRmtOffFrOutCir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 45 1 D Network Frames Lost MIB pdn FrExt mib E ABOYG1GIB Tag devFrExtDIciRmtDropFrOutCir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 55 1 D Network Frames Offered MIB pdn_FrExt mib E pea CAIN E Tag devFrExtDIciDropFrCirToEir 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLC number N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size H Host control index
17. Modifying a Login Logins are modified by deleting the incorrect login and creating a new one Deleting a Login B gt Procedure To delete a login record 1 Select Administer Logins Main Menu Control Administer Logins 2 Page through login pages records using the PgUp or PgDn function keys until the login to be deleted is displayed 3 Select Delete 4 Save your deletion When the deletion is complete the number of login pages records reflects one less record and the record before the deleted record reappears Example Page 2 of 4 is changed to Page 2 of 3 4 12 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance This chapter includes the following information m Displaying System Information m Viewing LEDs and Control Leads LED Descriptions Control Lead Descriptions m Device Messages m Status Information System and Test Status Messages which includes Self Test Results Messages Last System Reset Date and Time Health and Status Messages Test Status Messages Network LMI Reported DLClIs Status PVC Connection Status Time Slot Assignment Status P Routing Table Performance Statistics Clearing Performance Statistics Service Level Verification Performance Statistics DLCI Performance Statistics Frame Relay Performance Statistics ESF Line Performance Statistics Ethernet Performance Statistics m Trap Event Log 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 5 1 Ope
18. Select either the function s designated underlined character or Tab to the desired function key 3 Press Enter The function is performed To return to the screen area press Ctrl a again 2 8 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Selecting a Field User Interface and Basic Operation Once you reach the desired menu or screen select a field to view or change or issue a command Press the Tab or right arrow key to move the cursor from one field to another The current setting or value appears to the right of the field Entering Information 9123 A2 GB20 00 You can enter information in one of three ways Select the field then Manually type in enter the field value or command Example Entering bjk as a user s Login ID on the Administer Logins screen from the Control menu branch Type in enter the first letter s of a field value or command using the unit s character matching feature Example When configuring a port s physical characteristics with the Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks configuration option field selected possible settings include Disable Local DTPLB DCLB and Both entering d or D displays the first value starting with d Disable In this example entering dt or DT would display DTPLB as the selection Switch to the function keys area and select or enter a designated function key Example To save a configuration option change select Save S or s is the designated function key If a field is
19. Table 5 14 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 1 of 3 Statistic What It Indicates Frame Relay Link Frames Sent The number of frames sent over the interface Frames Received The number of frames received over the interface Characters Sent The number of data octets bytes sent over the interface Characters Received The number of data octets bytes received over the interface FECNs Received The number of foreword explicit congestion notifications received over the interface The network sends FECNs to notify users of data traffic congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the FECN indicator BECNs Received The number of backward explicit congestion notifications received over the interface The network sends BECNs to notify users of data traffic congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator Frame Relay Errors The number of total frame relay errors excluding LMI errors Short frames long frames invalid DLCls unknown DLCls and unknown errors are included in this total Total Errors Indicates that there may be a non frame relay device on the other end of the link or the units at either the far end or both ends of the link may be configured incorrectly Invalid Rx Frames The number of invalid frames received over the Network or Port 1 interface There is a non frame relay device on the other end of the link May 2000 9123 A2 GB2
20. Tag ifOutOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 10 32 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 4 1 D Rx FECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 1 D Rx BECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedBECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 1 D Tx Frames MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx Octets MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 1 D Rx Frames MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 9 1 D Rx Octets MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 5 4 8 1 2 1 Unavailable Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devTelcoFreeRunUAS 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 16 1 Rx Non octet Aligns MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size H Host control index P Protocol index T The time mask 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 B 23 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 14 History OID Cross Reference 2 of 5 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 3 1 D DLCI CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciFrCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 7 1 D Tx DEs MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciTxDE 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 8 1
21. Troubleshooting 9123 A2 GB20 00 This chapter includes the following Problem Indicators Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power Restoring Communication with a Miscontigured Unit Troubleshooting Management Link Feature LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface Alarms Viewing the Trap Event Log Troubleshooting Tables Device Problems Frame Relay PVC Problems Tests Available Test Timeout Feature Starting and Stopping a Test Aborting All Tests PVC Tests PVC Loopback Send Pattern Monitor Pattern Connectivity May 2000 6 1 Troubleshooting Physical Tests Line Loopback Payload Loopback Repeater Loopback Send Line Loopback Data Channel Loopbacks on a Frame Relay Link Send and Monitor Pattern Tests DTE Loopback P Ping Test Lamp Test Problem Indicators The unit provides a number of indicators to alert you to possible problems Indicators Viewing LEDs and Control Leads and LED Descriptions in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance as well as the user interface screen Main Menu gt Status gt Display LEDs and Control LEDs Health and status Health and Status Messages in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance Main Menu Status System and Test Status Messages a
22. and the word All cannot be used Select the WAN radio button above the Available Elements list Highlight all the DLC Is listed on the Available Elements list or select specific DLCls then select the left arrow button The highlighted DLCls move from the Available Elements list to the Group Members list Select the OK button when all appropriate DLCIs have been moved to the Group Members list The Add Groups dialog box closes and the newly created group appears on the Groups dialog box See Managing Groups and Group Lists in the Network Health Reports Guide for additional information That chapter also tells you how to customize reports May 2000 9 5 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Generating Reports for a Group Once Network Health has had sufficient time to gather data from the polled DLCls and the DLCls have been grouped you can start generating reports When selecting a report Section select WAN from the drop down list See Running Reports from the Console in the Network Health Reports Guide for additional information That section also tells you how to schedule automatic report generation NOTE Network Health provides information with each chart or table generally referred to as a report Click on the hyperlink Explanation of for an explanation of the report and its features You can also refer to the Network Health Reports Guide About Service Level Reports For long term analysis and rep
23. device Once a protocol has become active the protocol will be set to the protocol discovered Standard Annex A or Annex D on the frame relay link The protocol will not be updated after being initially discovered Frame relay links on user data ports discover the LMI protocol from an attached device via LMI status polls Frame relay links on the network interface discover LMI protocol by sending polls to an attached Network line and listening for correct poll response messages Auto On LMI Fail The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured to match the LMI protocol discovered from the attached Network line or the DTE device whenever an LMI Link Down failure occurs This option is available for frame relay links on the Port and network interfaces Frame relay links on user data ports discover the LMI protocol from LMI status polls by attached DTE devices Frame relay links on the network interface discover LMI protocol by sending polls to an attached Network line and listening for correct poll response messages Standard Supports Standard LMI and the Stratacom enhancements to the Standard LMI Annex A Supports LMI as specified by Q 933 Annex A Annex D Supports LMI as specified by ANSI T1 617 Annex D 3 34 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 6 Interface Frame Relay Options 2 of 3 LMI Parameters Possible Settings System Custom Default Setting System Allows you to use
24. i MAIN MENU SIEM Test Configuration Auto Configuration Control Easy Install Easy Install Service Type Node IP Address and Subnet Mask TS Access e Create Dedicated Network Management Link Ethernet Port Options Screen e Time Slot Assignment Screen e Selected Network Physical Interface Options 00 16700b May 2000 A 3 Menu Hierarchy Menu Hierarchy Leased Line Mode Status System and Test Status Timeslot Assignment Status IP Routing Table Performance Statistics Display LEDs and Control Leads Identity System and Timeslot Test Status Assignment Self Test Results Status e Last System e Network IP Routing Table Destination e Mask Performance Identity Statistics e System ESF Line e NAM Ethernet Clear All Statistics Reset Timeslot Health and Status Status Test Status e Gateway e Hop Type Interface e TTL MAIN MENU Status Test Physical Tests Configuration Network Control Data Port Physical Tests Bida Easy Install e Local Loopbacks IP Ping e Remote Loopbacks Lamp Test e Send Monitor Pattern Tests Abort All Tests Load Configuration Configuration Edit Display from System Network Data Ports Time Slot Assignment Management and Communication System General Network and Time Slot Management and Data Ports Assignment Communication Options e Physical e Sync Data Port e Node IP Assignments e Gene
25. or for a selected interface NOTE Although it is not required it is suggested that you progress through each screen in order from top to bottom Use the following procedures to assign cross connections Assigning Frame Relay Time Slots to the Network Interface Before assigning network time slots for use by frame relay traffic configure the network physical and frame relay options if needed then allow Time Slot Discovery to autodetect and assign the appropriate time slots to frame relay If Time Slot Discovery is not currently active you can manually assign time slots on the network interface for frame relay traffic using the Frame Relay Network Assignments screen This screen is read only when Time Slot Discovery is set to Enable for the network interface If Service Type is set to Frame Relay which is the default the Frame Relay Network 1 Assignment screen appears Main Menu Easy Install gt Time Slot Assignment Screen 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 29 Configuration Frame Relay Network Time Slot Assignment Screen Example main config tslot assign frame relay 9123 C SLV Device Name Node A 3 20 2000 23 32 FRAME RELAY NETWORK 1 ASSIGNMENT Time Slot Discovery Disable NO1 NO2 N03 N04 NO05 NO6 N07 N08 Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available FrameRlyl FrameRlyl FrameRlyl FrameRlyl FrameRly1 FrameRly1 N17 N118 N19 N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 FrameRly1 FrameRl
26. 0 0 cece ce eee 5 3 LEE NI cede chk oe eee eae eee kee MA eae wes 5 4 Control Lead Descriptions KAKA WAG BAKLA KALA HANDA NARRA 5 6 LOU UN ua AKA WAGK HANDLE NAL GE KN AMD BA AKA NN NANANG 5 7 Clete One eno en specs ecatarcnt beset ecentecharaceueseren tas 5 12 System and Test Status Messages 5 13 Network LMI Reported DLC ls Status 00 5 18 PVG CONNCCION OD UA NABA PAKAKAK NG Pda AKOA BANG 5 20 Time Slot Assignment Status cee ees 5 22 E a Tae eo ce pire ne eno sabe bene sosaueesacencaug nee 5 24 SAPIN PE A A d nes 5 26 Clearing Performance Statistics AA 5 27 Service Level Verification Performance Statistics 5 28 DLCI Performance Statistics AA aa 5 30 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 5 32 ESF Line Performance Statistics aaa aaa 5 35 Ethernet Performance Statistics aaa aaa aaa 5 38 HOP CD rere eee ee eee eee eee eee AKA KAG AG AGE Ika Ad 9 99 FIFTH sscrsserrcacd ces oe neebe dead EEA 5 40 Upgrading System Software 0 0 ccc een es 5 42 Determining Whether a Download Is Completed 5 43 GAANONG SONNETTE sas cs eu tetau AA KABA MAA HANG changoeatebas 5 43 Transferring Collected Data csiccicccscccesacedncaeeidenasaceas 5 44 May 2000 iii Contents 6 Troubleshooting E PED ICON 24 60058505585i550d46405400 8406 este deter enna 6 2 Resetting the
27. 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 23 1 D Rx FECNs MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs RFC 2115 1 min Tag frCircuitReceivedFECNs OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 4 1 D Rx BECNs MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs RFC 2115 1 min Tag frCircuitReceivedBECNs OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 1 D 60 secs 1 min Congested Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciSts CongestedSecs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 6 1 D Frames Dropped by Network MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciNetDropFr OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 20 1 D 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 Lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLC number 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 B 19 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area These alarms can be created during RMON initialization or when a DLCI is created They are put into the NetScout alarm area m Table B 12 identifies alarm defaults that do not change m lable B 13 identifies alarm defaults that change when the interface s line speed changes The thresholds for these alarms can be edited using NetScout Manager Plus so they match the values in the SLA between the customer and service provider Up to
28. 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 4 10 301 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 5 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 10 301 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 18 10 301 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 8 13 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices 5 Select History List from the View menu The History List window opens The newly defined user history variables should appear on this list History List serHistoryl serHistory UserHistory3 Ok Cancel 6 Highlight the desired set of user history variables and select the OK button Data is gathered based upon the configured user history variables This may take some time so please be patient 7 Select 2D or 3D Bar from the Format menu if desired 8D Bar is shown NetScout Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 NetScout Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 Interval 60 Seconds File View Format 0 11 02 16 11 07 16 11 12 17 11 17 17 11 22 17 11 27 17 Wed Oct 21 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 10 301 O 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 4 10 301 CJ 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 5 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 10 301 CJ 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 18 10 301 8 14 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 9123 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Using the 2D or 3D Bar to view the user history data collected you can click on a particular bar and get an expanded view of the data NetScout Custom Histo
29. 1 6 1 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxLong OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 7 1 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxDiscards OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 15 1 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTxDiscards OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 14 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLink TotRxErrs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 20 1 Interval 900 secs 15 mins 900 secs 15 mins 900 secs 15 mins 900 secs 15 mins 900 secs 15 mins 900 secs 15 mins These alarms apply to the FrameSaver unit s frame relay link interfaces They are created during RMON initialization Rising Falling Threshold Threshold Default Default 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 B 17 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 10 Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults 2 of 2 Tx Total Errors Rx Overruns Tx Underruns Rx Non octet Aligns Rx CRC Errors Total LMI Errors MIB Tag OID 2 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 19 1 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxOverruns OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 28 1 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTx Underruns OID 1 3
30. 2000 What It Means Green FrameSaver unit is in frame relay mode and LMI is up A recoverable signal is present on the network interface The signal cannot be recovered from the network interface An LOS condition exists At least one OOF was detected during the sampling period No OOFs were detected during the sampling period An alarm condition is present on the network interface Current alarm conditions m Alarm Indication Signal AIS Excessive Error Rate EER Loss of Signal LOS Loss of Frame LOF Out of Frame OOF m Yellow Alarm Signal No alarm condition is present on the network interface 5 5 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 3 User Data Port LED Operational The interchange circuits for the port Status are in the correct state to transmit and receive data OFF The port is idle Occurs if the port is disabled or if the port is configured to monitor DTR and or RTS and the lead s is not asserted Control Lead Descriptions 5 6 See Table 5 2 Network Interface LEDs for a description of these leads See Table 5 3 User Data Port LED to interpret the user data port OK control lead The LED descriptions and control lead descriptions are the same In addition to these LEDs additional control leads can be monitored through the Display LEDs and Control Leads screen These indicators show the current state of each control lead and what they indicate when they are
31. 35 menu branch 2 4 Health and Mode information 5 12 Status messages LED menu branch PVC connection 5 20 5 21 test messages time slot assignment 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 IN 9 Index Tests aborting 6 16 available 6 14 Connectivity Data Channel Loopback DTE Loopback 6 27 Duration 3 22 IP Ping 6 28 Lamp 6 30 Line Loopback 6 21 pattern 6 26 Payload Loopback 6 22 physical 6 20 PVC PVC Loopback 6 18 Remote Line Loopback Repeater Loopback Send Monitor Pattern starting or stopping Timeout 3 22 6 15 throughput time setting 3 10 slot assignment network status 5 22 synchronous data port to network time slots 3 29 Timeout Inactivity 3 51 3 60 Test trademarks A Traffic Policing 3 18 Training A transferring data Transmit Clock Invert Source 3 27 Transmit Timing transparent operation Trap Event Log Managers Number of 3 54 IN 10 Traps authentificationFailure DLCI Enterprise Specific 3 55 B 11 General Link Link Interfaces 3 56 linkUp and linkDown RMON RMON Specific B 14 SNMP and dial out options standards supported warmstart Trend report troubleshooting creating a management link device problems 6 11 frame relay PVC problems management link PVC tables 6 11 TruePut technology TS Access TS Management Link Access Level
32. 54 or ANSI T1 403 Annex B standard will be recognized and will control initiation and termination of a DCLB for the network frame relay link The actuate and release sequences do not need to match for example a DCLB started with a V 54 actuate sequence can be stopped with an FT1 release sequence ANSI Performance Report Messages Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether ANSI T1 403 compliance performance report messages PRMs are generated and sent to the network over the ESF facility data link every second Display Conditions This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF Enable Generates and sends PRMs Disable Does not generate and send PRMs 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 25 Configuration Table 3 4 Network Physical Interface Options 4 of 4 Excessive Error Rate Threshold Possible Settings 10E 4 10E 5 10E 6 10E 7 10E 8 10E 9 Default Setting 10E 4 Sets the error rate threshold that determines when an EER condition is declared The excessive error rate is determined by the ratio of the number of CRC6 errors to the total number of bits received over a set period of time Display Conditions This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF 10E 4 Declares an EER if more than 1 535 CRC6 errors are detected in a 10 second period Clears when fewer than 1 536 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 5 Decl
33. 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 29 1 MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRx NonOctet OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 16 1 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxCrcErr OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 17 1 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLink Total LMIErrs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 32 1 Interval 900 secs 15 mins 900 secs 15 mins 900 secs 15 mins 900 secs 15 mins 900 secs 15 mins 900 secs 15 mins Rising Falling Threshold Threshold Default Default 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB 2 Lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link B 18 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area These alarms apply to all DLCls on the network interface and can be created during RMON initialization or when a DLCI is created They are put into the Paradyne alarm area Table B 11 DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area Rising Falling Threshold Threshold MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Default Default DLCI Inactive Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Tag devFrExtDIciStsInactive 15 mins Secs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 2 1 D 900 secs 15 mins Missing Latency Responses MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciMissedSLVs OID
34. 9123 A2 GB20 00 assign community names and access levels AT commands At a Glance report authentificationFailure trap Auto Configuration Active setting up AutoRoute availability LMI and PVC B back door access when locked out Back to Back Mode Active operation setting up 3 15 Backspace basic FLEX feature set Bo 3 38 Be 3 38 BERT easy install verification Bit Stuffing blank field value branches menus bursting port C central clock changing configuration options operating mode 3 15 Service Type software release Channel Loopback 6 25 Character Length 3 59 matching CIR automatic determination enforcement statistics May 2000 IN 1 Index CIR bps 3 38 Circuit Identifier circuit multiplexed PVCs Clearing cross connection assignments Event LMI 3 18 3 35 existing information Statistics Clock Invert Transmit setting system 3 10 Source 3 22 Transmit COM port 3 43 8 55 8 62 connector Committed Burst Size Bc Bits 3 38 Information Rate CIR 3 38 Communication Port user interface options Community Name 3 49 assigning Concord s Network Health compatibility Configuration Auto Active displaying and changing options FTP transfer rate menu menu branch 2 4 option areas option tables saving options tables configuring added SLV units elements DLCI records manually 3 37 frame relay o
35. Color What It Means OK Power and Green Operational Status ALM Operational Red Alarm Fail Test Mode Yellow May 2000 ON FrameSaver unit has power and it is operational OFF FrameSaver unit is in a power on self test or there is a failure ON FrameSaver unit has just been reset or an error or fault has been detected Error fault alarm conditions m Alarm Indication Signal AIS m CTS Down DLCI Down DTR Down Exceeded Error Rate EER LMI Down Loss of Signal LOS Out of Frame OOF Primary Clock Failed Self Test Failed m SLV Timeout Two Level 1 Users Accessing Device m Yellow Alarm Signal OFF No failures have been detected These alarms appear on the System and Test Status screen See Health and Status Messages for additional information Loopback or test pattern is in progress initiated locally remotely or from the network No tests are active 9123 A2 GB20 00 9123 A2 GB20 00 Table 5 1 General Status LEDs 2 of 2 Label Indication Color FR Frame Relay Multi Mode Mode colored Operation and Maintenance What It Means Yellow FrameSaver unit is in frame relay OFF mode and LMI is down FrameSaver unit is in leased line mode On the Display LEDs amp Control Leads screen FR Mode is On or Off When On highlighted the FrameSaver unit is in Frame Relay mode Table 5 2 Network Interface LEDs Label Indication Color May
36. DLCI Example dvuhist f Dallas51 301 3 config 30 60 Dallas301 udh The same user history table number can be used for both the link and DLCI For these examples user history table number 3 will appear as UserHistory3 on the History List See Step 5 in Monitoring a DLCs History Data to verify that the user defined history files have been loaded Refer to nstalling UDH Files in Using Custom History of the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional information May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Monitoring a DLCI s History Data Once the monitoring variables have been defined a problem DLCI can monitored B Procedure To monitor user history data 1 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay radio button still selected select the Traffic radio button The appropriate icons appear 2 Highlight an agent in the agent list box so that its DLC Is appear in the DLCI list box under the agent list box 3 Highlight the DLCI to be monitored 4 Click on the Custom History icon The NetScout Custom History window Opens Adjust the size of the window so the entire report can be viewed NetScout Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 NetScout Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 Interval 60 Seconds File View Format 0 11 00 16 11 05 16 11 10 17 11 15 17 11 20 16 11 25 16 Wed Oct 21 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 10 301 1 10 32 2 1 8 10 301
37. E Tag devFrExtLinkUtilRxOctets MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkUtilTxOctets See Table B 15 on page B 28 for an RMON alarm OID cross reference May 2000 B 27 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 15 Alarm OID Cross Reference 1 of 2 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 4 1 D Rx FECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 1 D Rx BECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedBECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 1 D Frames Sent MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx CIR Utilization MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx DLCI Link Utilization MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 1 D Frames Received 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 9 1 D Rx DLCI Link Utilization MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 5 4 8 1 2 1 Unavailable Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devTelcoFreeRunUAS 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 1 D Tx Frames Exceeding CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciTxFrOutCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 20 1 D Frames Dropped by Netwo
38. FR1 would not appear as a valid setting Net1 FR1 Specifies the Network interface as the destination link Destination DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the destination DLCI for a frame relay interface The DLC must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection NOTES Primary Destination DLCI has no value if Primary Destination Link contains no value For the basic FLEX feature set only one EDLCI per multiplexed DLCI may be used in the PVC connection 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI number Destination EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the destination Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCI for a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection Display Conditions This option only appears when the Primary Destination DLCI contains a multiplexed DLCI record number 0 62 Specifies the EDLCI number May 2000 3 41 Configuration Setting Up Management and Communication Options The following options can be selected from the Management and Communication menu Node IP Options m Management PVC Options General SNMP Management Options m Telnet and FTP Sessions Options m SNMP NMS Security Options m SNMP Traps Options m Ethernet
39. FrameSaver FLEX and SLV specific support May 2000 8 1 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Preparation Before getting started you need to copy some OpenLane directories to a NetScout Manager Plus user directory OpenLane provides these directories as a starting point for loading new alarms and creating history files A template of alarms and values for configuring alarms and several templates for creating history files specific to the FrameSaver unit are available OpenLane paradyne directories include the following m Properties paradyne fsd file found in OpenLane netscout alarms directory m Properties paradyne fst file found in OpenLane netscout alarms directory Alarms slvtemplate fct file found in OpenLane netscout alarms directory User history pd udh files found in OpenLane netscout userHistory directory These files should be moved to SNSHOME usr so they can be used See Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template and Creating History Files tor additional information 8 2 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Configuring NetScout Manager Plus 9123 A2 GB20 00 For the NetScout Manager Plus main window to appear make sure your environment is set up exactly as specified in your NetScout Readme file You need to Copy the OpenLane directory to a user directory Add frame relay agents to the NetScout Manager Configure agent properties Verif
40. IP network is connected to the communications port select COM a If the default IP network is connected to a far end device over the management PVC named London for the remote device located in the London office select the PVC name London as defined by the Name configuration option Table 3 10 Management PVC Options NOTE Ifthe link to the IP destination selected as the default route becomes disabled or down the unrouteable data will be discarded Make sure that the link selected is operational and if that link goes down change the default destination CAUTION Use care when configuring a default route to an interface that has a subnet route configured at a remote end where the NMS router LAN adapter terminal server etc is connected Communicating with an unknown IP address on the subnet will cause temporary routing loops which will last 16 iterations times the retry count None No default network destination is specified Unrouteable data will be discarded This is the recommended setting COM Specifies that the default destination is connected to the COM port Only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 3 16 Communication Port Options Ethernet Specifies that the default destination is connected to the Ethernet port Only appears when the Ethernet port s Interface Status option is enabled When selected the Default Gateway Address must also be configured see Table 3 15 Ethernet Port Options
41. KGG 3 42 Configuring Management PVCs 0 00 ccc eee eee 3 46 Configuring General SNMP Management 045 3 49 Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support 3 50 Configuring SNMP NMS Security 00 0 e eee eee eee 3 53 COMMUNIC NP TADS 24 24 WADA bv idea ee hua ER rhs ARKA GANA 3 54 Configuring the Ethernet Port 0 620020 ccce0ccsece kanaan hahaaha 3 57 Configuring the Communication Port aa 3 58 Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem 3 62 li May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Contents 4 Security and Logins LIU ACCESS AA 4 2 Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access 4 2 Controlling External COM Port Device Access 4 4 Controlling Telnet or FTP Access 0 aaa 4 4 Limiting Telnet Access a ck be cores AG AG KA AA wens 4 5 LNG ek as AAP NAKA KAPA KAP BA MAKI mena 4 6 Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link 4 7 Controlling SNMP AccesS maan vena AREA HABI ENE A AT BA MANGA ENG 4 8 Disabling SNMP Access 2 2 2 4 8 Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels 4 9 Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses 4 10 GC ab AA AA 4 11 PSC I oud sca AA AP 4 12 BEL ge 62 en50cnc donee int entnawe ena PP PA 4 12 5 Operation and Maintenance 9123 A2 GB20 00 Displaying System Information 0 0 00 a 5 2 Viewing LEDs and Control Leads
42. Mgmt PVC Name DLCI 16 to 1007 May 2000 m Source destination is frame relay link 1 on Network 1 m User data port Port 1 m Virtual circuit is a management link that terminates in the unit where Name is the link name For standard DLC Is Identifies an individual link connection embedded within a DLCI 9123 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 10 PVC Connection Status 2 of 2 Field Status What It Indicates EDLCI O to 62 For multiplexed DLCls only Identifies an individual link connection embedded within a DLCI Status Identifies whether the physical interfaces LMIs and DLCls are all enabled and active for this PVC connection Active The PVC is currently active Inactive m The PVC is inactive because Alarm conditions and network and SLV communication status indicate that data cannot be successfully passed The unit has disabled the interface or frame relay link due to internal operating conventions Activation of an alternate virtual circuit is not warranted that is no alarm condition on the primary destination link has been detected Disabled The PVC cannot be activated and is essentially disabled as a result of how the unit was configured Possible causes The physical interface at one or both ends of the PVC is are disabled The frame relay link on one or both ends of the PVC is are disabled Invalid Some portion of the PVC co
43. N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Availablel Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save ClearAll Value Meaning Specifies Net1 network time slots This field represents time slot tt of the network interface Available The time slot is currently unassigned Synchronous data Port 1 is assigned to the time slot 3 32 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration B Procedure 1 Select one of the following menu selection sequences Main Menu Configuration Time Slot Assignment gt Sync Data Port Assignments or Main Menu Easy Install gt Time Slot Assignment Screen When Service Type is set to Leased Line 2 Select an interface in the Assign To field A matrix of the current cross connect status of all time slots on the selected interface appears 3 Move the cursor to the next time slot that can be edited underlined Use the spacebar or type in the desired time slot to display its time slot assignment 4 Repeat Step 3 until the synchronous data port is assigned to all desired time slots 5 Save the configuration Clearing Assignments Clearing assignments sets all time slots to Unassgn unassigned Main Menu Configuration Time Slot Assignment Clear Assignments 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 33 Configuration Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface Select Frame Relay from the interface s menu to di
44. Once Network Health is installed you need to set up the application so it will support FrameSaver units Each Network Health application provides a different set of functions called a module Each module used requires a separate license to gain access to those features and functions Make sure you license the Poller application so you can poll FLEX units and collect data To use this application 1 Discover network elements units and interfaces in the network 2 Configure the Network Health applications then save them 3 Organize elements into groups for reporting purposes 4 Set up and run reports Setup and operation information is contained in the Network Health User Guide The sections that follow address only the minimal procedural steps needed once you have access to the applications See the Network Health User and Reports Guides for additional startup information and a full discussion of the application s features and how to use them 9 2 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Discovering FrameSaver Elements Once licenses are entered and you have access to the applications the Discover dialog box opens Use this dialog box to search for FLEX units in your network and discover their DLC Is Saving the results of the search creates definitions in the Poller Configuration which are used to poll the units IP addresses and the Community String for the FrameSaver units must be
45. Port Options Communication Port Options External Modem COM Port Options Configuring Node IP Information Select Node IP to display add or change the information necessary to support general IP communications for the node see Table 3 9 When deploying units to remote sites minimally configure the Node IP Address and Subnet Mask Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication Node IP This set of configuration options includes a Troubleshooting TS Management Link feature to help service providers isolate device problems within their networks This feature allows Telnet or FTP access to the unit on this link Troubleshooting over this link is essentially transparent to customer operations No alarms or SNMP traps are generated to create nuisance alarms for the customer TS Access Management Link is initially disabled in most models but the link can be enabled at any time Any valid network Management PVC created on a standard DLCI can be used When enabled a troubleshooting link can be accessed any time the service provider requests access An assigned security level can also control access When a DLCI has been defined as the troubleshooting management link the link is identified in the status field at the bottom of the Management PVC Entry screen with the Note This PVC has been designated as the TS Access Management Link message NOTE The unit may come from the factory with a TS Management PVC already s
46. Sent SLVFramesSnt Rx DLC Utilization SLVrxDLCIUtil Tx CIR Utilization SLVTxCIRUtil Frames Sent Above CIR SLVFramesTxAbvCIR Tx DLCI Utilization SLVTxDLCIUtil Average Latency AverageLatency Frames Received SLVFramesRec Current Latency CurrentLatency These alarms and current values can be found in NSHOME usr slvtemplate fct which is used as a starting point for loading new alarms This file can be copied and edited so the alarm threshold values match service level agreement values The copied fct file can then be used to replicate alarm threshold values for all DLCls on the unit using the eztrap utility All fct files must be in NSHOME usr To configure alarms manually see Adding SLV Alarms Manually NOTE Perl must be installed in your system to use the eztrap utility in the procedure below If you have an NT system please install Perl before proceeding B Procedure 1 Open a terminal window and go to SNSHOME usr 2 Type eztrap i filename fct o agentname fct agentname and press Enter to run the eztrap utility to create alarm threshold values across all DLCls for the copied fct file The message eztrap done appears when the fct file is transferred 3 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window 4 Edit any alarm values that need to be chan
47. T1 Remote Site with 16 PVCs and 9123 A1 221 Basic FLEX and Advanced FLEX SLV Feature Sets Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 Vac Power Supply Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference FrameSaver FLEX 9123 C T1 Central Site with 64 PVCs and 9123 A1 213 Basic FLEX Feature Set Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 Vac Power Supply Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference FrameSaver FLEX 9123 C SLV T1 Central Site with 64 PVCs and 9123 A1 223 Basic FLEX and Advanced FLEX SLV Feature Sets Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 Vac Power Supply Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference FrameSaver FLEX SLV Upgrade FrameSaver FLEX 9123 SLV Activation Certificate 9123 C1 220 FrameSaver FLEX 9123 User s Guide Paper Manual 9123 A2 GB20 May 2000 E 1 Equipment List Cables E 2 NMS Products OpenLane Enterprise OpenLane Workgroup NetScout Manager Plus For UNIX or Windows NT NetScout Server For UNIX or Windows NT Model Feature Number 7805 D1 001 7805 D1 003 NetScout WebCast For UNIX or Windows NT 9155 Optional Features Wall Mounting Kit for 1 Slot Housing 9001 F 1 891 Shelf Mounting Kit for 1 Slot Housings 9001 F 1 894 This table lists cables you can order Description RJ48C T1 Network Cable RJ48C to RJ48C RJ49C 20 feet 6 1 meters For use in the U S T1 Line Interface Cable RJ48C to CA81A 20 feet 6 1 meters
48. Time Slot Assignment PVC Connections Management and Communication PVC Connection Table e Source Link DLCI EDLCI e Primary Destination Link DLCI EDLCI Time Slot Assignment Frame Relay Network Assignments e Clear Assignments New or Modify PVC Connection Entry i May 2000 Auto Configuration Control Easy Install Management and Communication Options e Node IP e Management PVCs e General SNMP Management e Telnet and FTP Session SNMP NMS Security New or Modify e SNMP Traps Ethernet Port e Communication Port External Modem Com Port Management PVC Entry 00 16700a 9123 A2 GB20 00 9123 A2 GB20 00 Menu Hierarchy MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Control Easy Install Auto Configuration e Frame Relay Discovery Mode e Automatic Circuit Removal MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Easy Install Control System Information Administer Logins Change Operating Mode Select Software Release LMI Packet Capture Utility Disconnect Modem Reset Device System Information Administer Logins Select Software Release LMI Packet Capture Utility Device Name e Login ID e Current Release e Capture Interface e System Name e Password Alternate Release e Packet Capture Start Stop Location Contact Access Level e Switch amp Reset Status e Date e Packets in Buffer e Time e Display LMI Trace Log New
49. Trap Event Log in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance for a screen example and additional information Troubleshooting Tables The unit is designed to provide many years of trouble free service However if a problem occurs refer to the appropriate table in the following sections for possible solutions Device Problems Table 6 2 Device Problems 1 of 2 Symptom Possible Cause Solutions No power or the LEDs The power cord is not Check that the power cord is are not lit securely plugged into the securely attached at both ends wall receptacle to rear panel connection The wall receptacle has no Check the wall receptacle power power by plugging in some equipment that is Known to be working Check the circuit breaker Verify that your site is not on an energy management program Power On Self Test The unit has detected an Reset the unit and try again fails Only Alarm LED internal hardware failure is on after power up Contact your service representative Return the unit to the factory refer to Warranty Sales Service and Training Information on page A of this document 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 6 11 Troubleshooting 6 12 Table 6 2 Device Problems 2 of 2 Symptom Cannot access the unit or the menu driven user interface Failure xxxxxxxx appears at the top of the System and Test Status screen at Self Test Results An LED appears dysfunctional Not receiving data Recei
50. Unit and Restoring Communication 6 3 Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu 05 6 3 Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power 6 3 Restoring Communication with a Misconfigured Unit 6 4 Troubleshooting Management Link Feature 6 5 LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature 0 0 ccc cece eee 6 5 Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface 6 6 NMS oo foi 9 APP ee od PAP PR ORA 6 7 Viewing the Trap Event Log 255 KAG BP WG AGA MAA DAKALILEDIDIKDADLERGGA 6 11 Troubleshooting Tales a AA a AE KA PAA MA KNANG Ea seen kas 6 11 PONG 5 tee odes DA KAPG NA MAPAG PAG ee eae es KAG 6 11 Frame Relay PVC Problems sm LAGA NAKAKA DAG HA 6 13 m Tests Available aaah ANAN eben oedeatiedes ne needle K KARA ARA FANGA 6 14 Test Timeout Feature a 6 15 m Starting and Stopping a Test a 6 15 POG PAM AA AMA 6 16 Me AA 6 17 ayo PAA AA AA 6 18 a PAKANAN PANA bank eee PAGA se aase dies egies 6 18 Monitor Pattern so 2 sna BA BG BKA KAKA KI KA Ee RAS Eee ed oad 6 19 SPE oe re oe ps eo idir itia naaa eae Be ees es 6 19 Mice Bl eee ee eee ee eee ee ee ee Se ee ee ee 6 20 ly oa Banalo eee ere eee se ee eee eee a ree eee ee eee 6 21 Pee LOOPDACK bee eo APA PA PP ashes aces 6 22 Repeater Loopback a kak kA KAG AD AVG KANAN ANAKAN 6 23 Send Line Loopback upa EARN BKA KAN BANNA acess NGA NE Am 6 24 Data Channel Loopb
51. appear in the box below the application bar Help we Application 4 Admin Click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window Select the Add button down the center of the screen Minimally enter the following Agent name IP address Enter 1 for the frame relay logical interface to be monitored Properties File Select paradyne Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to add the agent discover its DLCls and return to the Configuration Manager main window The frame relay agent just entered appears in the agent list box with its DLCls in the DLCI list box at the bottom of the screen Select the Test button fourth button down center of the screen to make sure you can communicate with the agent Refer to Adding Frame Relay Agents in the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide for additional information May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template For FrameSaver units with the SLV and SLM Reporting feature set once DLCls have been discovered SLV alarms should be configured and assigned to each DLCI OpenLane provides a template for configuring alarms DLCI alarms can be configured manually but using the Paradyne alarm defaults template greatly reduces configuration time The following alarms are configured for each DLCI included in the Paradyne MIB Frames
52. be selected for a trend report e g burst octets but a bandwidth trend report should be generated when investigating problems that appear on Exceptions Reports Supplemental Reports and Health reports Use trend reports to view individual variables for DLCls having a high Health Index rating to help locate which variable is causing a problem leading to a DLCI s poor Health Index rating FrameSaver SLV Plus At a Glance Report For FrameSaver units with the SLV and SLM reporting feature set performs trend analysis on up to ten specified variables for DLCls see page 9 9 for an example This is the first Network Health report to integrate the FrameSaver FLEX SLV units unique monitoring capabilities using the units SLV advanced network statistics 9 8 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Paradyne Frame Saver SLV Plus At a Glance Report WAN Element Largo RedBank ci 10 895 Bytes In bytes 38t Latency Maximum Average meach ERE 25K 25K LEK HK Bete emp Bytes Out bytes sec Burst Out Distribution bytes sec insite 163k TE 120K Cd ya o se CT amp z T amp T 1 BA bars Aangel E Buri Range E Bursi Range 3 Frames in frames sec E Burst Range 4 E Burst Range 5 PO a an an Pal i rat aN Network Frame Drops 280 Frames Out lrames 5ec Frames Gut Size Distribution lrames sec an FHI EO 5 i Ci a a Aa aaa E OO bytos GR OO by
53. data DLCI is inactive on the Verify that the DLCI s is frame relay network active on the LMI Reported DLCls screen If the DLCI s is not active contact the service provider Verify the LMI Reported DLCI field on the Interface Status screen DTE is configured incorrectly Check the DTE s configuration Configure LMI characteristics to match those of the DTE or network LMI is not configured properly for the DTE or network LMI link is inactive Verify that the LMI link is active on the network the Status Msg Received counter on the Network Frame Relay Performance Statistics screen increments Losing Data Frame relay network is Run PVC Loopback and Pattern experiencing problems tests to isolate the problem then contact the service provider Out of Sync If Monitor Pattern was Verify that the unit at the selected it means the test other end is configured to pattern generator and Send Pattern receiver have not yet Correct unit configurations synchronized Correct the CIR setting so both units are configured the same CIR settings for the units at each end are mismatched If the message persists it means that 5 packets out of o the a S A 25 are missing or are out of a Ga ny ea sequence Contact the service provider May 2000 6 13 Troubleshooting Tests Available The following tests are available to a FrameSaver FLEX 9123 Test Menu Example
54. eight alarms per interface are allowed Any additional alarms are added to the Paradyne Area alarms and they cannot be changed using NetScout software See Editing Alarms in Chapter 8 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Table B 12 Static DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area 1 of 2 Rising Falling Threshold Threshold MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Default Default Current Latency MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 60 secs Must be fi l Tag devFrExtLatencyLatest mun comin OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 71 D Average Latency MIB pdn FrExt mib E 900 secs Must be Tag devFrExtLatencyAvg bg Ena COMNGurEe OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 5 1 D Frames Received MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs Must be RFC 2115 1 min configured Tag frCircuitReceivedFrames OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 1 D Frames Sent MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs Must be RFC 2115 1 min configured Tag frCircuitSentFrames OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 1 D 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 Lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number B 20 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 12 Static DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area 2 of 2 Rising Falling Event Threshold Threshold MIB T
55. entered is less than 16 or greater than 1007 May 2000 Operation and Maintenance Contact service provider if test initiated by the network Wait until the test ends and message clears Cancel all tests from the Test screen Path main test Stop the test from the same screen the test was started from Wait and try again Contact one of the IP address user and request that they log off Log on to the FrameSaver unit No action is needed Enter a valid CIR 0 1536000 Enter a valid Excess Burst Size 0 1536000 Enter a valid number 16 1007 5 11 Operation and Maintenance Status Information Status information is useful when monitoring the FrameSaver unit The following illustration shows the Status menu for the FrameSaver 9123 unit Status Menu main status 9123 C SLV Device Name Node A 3 26 2000 23 32 STATUS System and Test Status IMI Reported DLCIs PVC Connection Status Time Slot Assignment Status IP Routing Table Performance Statistics Trap Event Log Display LEDs and Control Leads Identity Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit NOTE Status messages in the following sections are in alphabetical order 5 12 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance System and Test Status Messages 9123 A2 GB20 00 System and test status information is selected from the Status menu Main Menu gt Status gt System an
56. errors include Internal transmit and receive errors Transmitter and receiver overruns m Receive checksum errors Alignment errors Long frames Excessive Collisions The number of failed frame transmissions due to excessive collisions Carrier Sense Errors The number of times the carrier sense condition was lost or was never asserted during frame transmissions Deferred The number of delayed first transmissions due to the line being Transmissions busy 5 38 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Trap Event Log The Trap Event Log displays all traps stored in the SNMP trap event log The following log example describes the alarm conditions that will generate an SNMP trap for a physical interface and for the frame relay LMIs and DLCls These alarm conditions also generate Health and Status messages seen on the System and Test Status screen Main Menu gt Status gt Trap Event Log Trap Event Log Screen Example main status event log 9123 C SLV Device Name Node A 3 26 2000 23 32 TRAP EVENT LOG Total Trap Events 535 Time Elapsed Since Event Event Od 23 59 59 Change in Frames Discarded due to Inbound Resource Errors on Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay link Port 1 exceeded threshold of 1 by 105 Change in Total LMI Errors on Network T1 frame relay link Net1 FR1 exceeded threshold of 1 by 59 DLCI 101 of Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay link Port 1 up DLCI 101 of Sync
57. extensive online Help system the application is self documenting and you have access to the most current system information 9123 A2 GB20 00 B Procedure To set up FrameSaver FLEX and FLEX SLV support 1 2 Oy AL es O Start the OpenLane services then access the application Enter Admin for access to customer profiles frame relay access facilities components and PVC components Add FrameSaver devices Create customer profiles Set up historical data collection Set up SLV report filters for Web access to report data for FrameSaver units with the FLEX SLV feature set activated See the Quick Start Installation Instructions to learn how to perform these steps and for additional information May 2000 7 3 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices 7 4 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices 9123 A2 GB20 00 This chapter includes NetScout Manager Plus information as it relates to FrameSaver FLEX devices It includes the following Preparation Configuring NetScout Manager Plus Adding FrameSaver FLEX Units to the NetScout Manager Plus Network Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template Editing Alarms Adding SLV Alarms Manually Creating History Files Installing the User Defined History Files Monitoring a DLCI s History Data Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus Release 5 5 or higher of the NetScout Manager Plus software provides
58. for Net Link OOF at Network 1 An Out of Frame OOF condition is detected on the network interface Incompatible framing Check that the framing format format between the for the network interface is network and the correct FrameSaver unit Network cabling Check that the network cable problem is securely attached at both ends T1 facility problem Contact your network provider 2 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network port Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 6 9 Troubleshooting Table 6 1 Alarm Conditions 4 of 4 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do Primary Clock Failed A failure of the configured Check that the network cable primary clock source for the is securely attached at both unit was detected and the ends secondary clock is providing the timing for the unit Contact your network provider This condition clears when the configured primary clock is restored Self Test Failure The unit did not pass its Reset the unit basic verification tests when it was powered on or Contact your service reset representative SLV Timeout An excessive number of Verify that the network LMI is up DLCI nnnn SLV communication If it is contact your network frame relay link 1 2 responses from the remote service provider system have been missed on the specified multipl
59. function keys Keyboard Keys Use the following keyboard keys to navigate within the screen area To Move cursor between the screen area and the screen function keys area Return to the previous screen Right Arrow on same screen row or Move cursor to the next field Tab on any screen row Left Arrow on same screen row or Move cursor to the previous field Ctrl k Backspace Move cursor one position to the left or to the last character of the previous field Spacebar Select the next valid value for the field Delete Del Delete character that the cursor is on Up Arrow or Ctrl u Move cursor up one field within a column on the same screen Down Arrow or Ctrl d Move cursor down one field within a column on the same screen Right Arrow or Ctrl f Move cursor one character to the right if in edit mode Left Arrow or Cirl b Move cursor one character to the left if in edit mode 2 6 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Function Keys 9123 A2 GB20 00 User Interface and Basic Operation Redraw the screen display clearing information typed in but not yet entered Enter Return Accept entry or when pressed before entering data or after entering invalid data display valid options on the last row of the screen All function keys located in the lower part of the screen see the example on page 2 5 operate the same way throughout the screens They are not case sensitive so upper or lowercase letters can b
60. ifDescr and the iflndex that Paradyne has assigned to each Table B 1 Paradyne Interface Objects Information ifName Description ifDescr ifEntry 2 ifIndex Physical Layer Network T1 T1 network interface Network T1 T1 FR NAM 101001001 Hardware Version hhhh hhh Ethernet Ethernet Port Ethernet Port T1 FR NAM 101006001 Hardware Version hhhh hhh Sync Data Port Synchronous Data Synchronous Data Port Slot 1 101003001 S01P1 Port 1 Port 1 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh COM Communications port COM Port T1 FR NAM 101004001 Hardware Version hhhh hhh Frame Relay Logical Layer FR UNI Frame relay logical For the DTE side 101015001 link on the T1 network Network T1 of FR DTE interface T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the DCE side Network T1 of FR SERVICE T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh Frame relay logical For the user side 101016001 link on the Synchronous Data Port of Synchronous Data FR DTE Slot 1 Port 1 Port 1 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the network side Synchronous Data Port of FR SERVICE Slot 1 Port 1 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh B 4 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable 9123 A2 GB20 00 For remote monitoring at sites where FrameSaver units are operating with NetScout Probes use the following ifName ifDescr and iflndex Tab
61. in this column when LMI Protocol is set to Standard If blank the switch does not support this feature 1 ET aaa for 10 seconds only before the network changes Deleted to Inactive ET aaa New to Active May 2000 5 19 Operation and Maintenance PVC Connection Status 5 20 PVC connection statuses are selected from the Status menu Main Menu gt Status PVC Connection Status Only PVC connections with Source DLCls configured to be Active are shown This screen only appears when Service Type is set to Frame Relay Field Status PVC Connection Status Screen Example main status connections Device Name Node A 9123 C SLV 05 26 1999 23 32 Page 1 of 2 PVC CONNECTION STATUS Source Primary Destination Link DLCI EDLCI Link DLCI Status Port 1 201 Net1 FR1 Port 1 202 Net1 FR1 Port 1 100 Net1 FR1 Port 1 204 Net1 FR1 Mgmt PVC Mgm205 Net1 FR1 Port 1 206 Net1 FR1 Port 1 207 Net1 FR1 Port 1 208 Net1 FR1 Port 1 209 Net1 FR1 Net1 FR1 Refresh PgUp 300 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 500 502 Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Inactive Inactive ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Ifthe No PVC Connections message appears instead of a list of PVC connections no PVC connections have been configured yet Table 5 10 PVC Connection Status 1 of 2 What It Indicates Link Identifies the cross connection of DLCls configured for the unit Net1 FR1 Port 1
62. is exceeded Display Conditions This option only appears for units with the FLEX SLV feature set Enable Sends RMON trap messages when set thresholds are exceeded Disable Does not send RMON trap messages May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Configuring the Ethernet Port 9123 A2 GB20 00 Select Ethernet Port from the Management and Communication menu to configure the Ethernet port see Table 3 15 Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication gt Ethernet Port Table 3 15 Ethernet Port Options 1 of 2 Interface Status Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the Ethernet port is being used and can be configured Enable The port is active It can receive Version 2 or IEEE 802 3 MAC frames or transmit Version 2 MAC frames only Disable The port is not active When the port is disabled the following will occur No alarms or traps configured for the port will be generated m All port uses that refer to the Ethernet port like the Default IP Destination and Initial Route Destination will be reset to their default values see Table 3 9 Node IP Options and Table 3 14 SNMP Traps Options IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address needed to access the Ethernet port 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP addr
63. main test 9123 C SLV Device Name Node A 3 26 2000 23 32 TEST Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests Network Physical Tests Data Port Physical Tests IP Ping Lamp Test Abort All Tests Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Network and Data Port PVC Tests do not appear on the menu when one of the following is the case The FrameSaver unit is operating in leased line mode Check the Service Type setting on the Easy Install screen Main Menu 5 Easy Install m No PVCs have been configured on the interface Check that both ends of the cables are properly seated and secured Tests can be commanded from the OpenLane SLM system using its enhanced Diagnostic Troubleshooting graphical interface as well as from the menu driven user interface 6 14 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting Test Timeout Feature A Test Timeout feature is available to automatically terminate a test as opposed to manually terminating a test after it has been running a specified period of time It is recommended that this feature be used when the FrameSaver unit is remotely managed through an inband data stream PVO If a test is accidently commanded to execute on the interface providing management access control is regained when the specified time period expires automatically terminating the test To use this feature enable the Test Timeout configuration option and set a duration for the test to run in t
64. managed frame relay It is intended for system designers engineers administrators and operators You must be familiar with the functional operation of digital data communications equipment and frame relay networks Section Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Description About the FrameSaver FLEX 9123 Identifies how the FrameSaver 9123 unit fits into Paradyne s Service Level Management SLM solution and describes the unit s basic features and if ordered its advanced Service Level Verification and Management SLV and SLM features User Interface and Basic Operation Shows how to navigate the user interface Configuration Provides configuration information for the FLEX unit Security and Logins Provides procedures for controlling access to the FLEX unit and setting up logins Operation and Maintenance Provides procedures to display unit identification information and perform file transfers as well as how to display and interpret status and statistical information Troubleshooting Provides device problem resolution alarm and other information as well as troubleshooting and test procedures May 2000 vii About This Guide Section Description Chapter 7 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices ldentifies where installation and setup information is located and how FrameSaver units are supported Chapter 8 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Desc
65. matched here access is denied and an authenticationFailure trap is generated If a match is found the type of access read only or read write is determined by the corresponding Access Type Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Adds to or changes the NMS IP address Clear Fills the NMS IP address with zeros Access Type Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Specifies the type of access allowed for an authorized NMS when IP address validation is performed Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command to the MIB objects This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP Get and Set commands to the MIB objects However access for all read only objects is specified as read only 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 53 Configuration Configuring SNMP Traps Select SNMP Traps from the Management and Communication menu to configure SNMP traps when a trap is generated see Table 3 14 Main Menu gt Configuration s Management and Communication gt SNMP Traps See Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults for trap format standards and special trap featur
66. no download has occurred or the download was not successful Serial Number Unit s 7 character serial number Ethernet MAC Address Media Access Control MAC address assigned to the Ethernet port during manufacturing 5 2 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Viewing LEDs and Control Leads 9123 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance The FrameSaver 9123 unit s faceplate includes LEDs light emitting diodes that provide status on the unit and its interfaces FrameSaver FLEX 00 16707 The Display LEDs and Control Leads screen allows you to monitor a remote unit and is useful when troubleshooting control lead problems The appropriate interfaces are shown on this screen with the appropriate status highlighted Main Menu gt Status Display LEDs and Control Leads Display LEDs amp Control Leads Screen main status leds Device Name Node A GENERAL OK Alarm Test FR Mode Refresh 9123 C SLV 3 26 2000 23 32 DISPLAY LEDS amp CONTROL LEADS SLOT 1 T1 FR NAM NETWORK1 Sig OOF Alm LMI OK Refresh the screen to view control lead transitions LED and control lead descriptions are in the sections that follow May 2000 5 3 Operation and Maintenance LED Descriptions 5 4 The following table identifies the alarms that cause the Alarm LED to light See Table 5 2 and Table 5 3 for network and user data port interface LED information Table 5 1 General Status LEDs 1 of 2 Label Indication
67. of 4 Network Initiated PLB Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Allows the initiation and termination of the payload loopback PLB to be controlled by the receipt of PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands from the network Display Conditions This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF Enable PLB is controlled by PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands Receiving a PLB Actuate command causes the system to enter a payload loopback provided a PLB can be performed in the unit s current state Receiving a PLB Release command terminates the PLB Disable The FrameSaver unit ignores the PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands NOTE When disabled the unit is not in compliance with ANSI T1 403 or AT amp T TR 54016 Network Initiated DCLB Possible Settings Disable V 54 amp ANSI Default Setting V 54_ amp ANSI Allows the initiation and termination of the Data Channel Loopback DCLB V 54 Loop 2 to be controlled by the receipt of a DCLB actuate or DCLB release sequence either V 54 or FT1 ANSI compliant from the network on the DSOs used for the network frame relay link When enabled and a DCLB activate sequence Is received the unit initiates a DCLB on the network interface When a DCLB release sequence is received the DCLB is stopped Disable DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences are ignored V 54 8 ANSI DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences that comply with either V
68. or physical failure The DLCI has been deleted The network no longer supports the DLCI and it was removed enterpriseDLCI delete 1 7 Strings SifString deleted by Auto DLCI delete SifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown enterpriseDLCIUp 1 2 DLCI Status is set to Active DLCI is up again String SifString up May 2000 B 11 Table B 7 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults enterprise Specific Traps and Variable Bindings 2 of 3 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause enterpriseMissedSLv Down 16 enterpriseMissedSLv Up 116 enterprisePrimary ClockFail 1 enterprisePrimary ClockFailClear 101 enterpriseRMON Reset ToDefault 13 enterpriseSelfTest Fail 2 m devFrExtDicilflndex devFrExt mib devFrExtDiciDlci devFrExt mib devFrExtDIciMissed SLVs devFrExt mib devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib May 2000 SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold has been exceeded String SLV down on SifString due to excessive SLV packet loss Total SLV packets lost is numLost SLV Timeout Error Event has been cleared String SLV up on SifString because SLV communication was reestablished Total SLV packets lost is numLost Operating
69. previous contents of the DLCI number field is restored A file transfer was performed successfully File Transfer Complete Seen at an FTP terminal Switch to the newly downloaded software See Changing Software A file transfer was attempted but it was not successful File Transfer Failed Invalid file Seen at an FTP terminal m Try again making sure you type the filename correctly Exit the FTP session or download another file See Changing Software Invalid Character x A non valid printable ASCII Reenter information using valid character has been characters entered A non valid date was entered on the System Information screen Invalid date must be mm dd yyyy Reenter the date in the month day 4 digit year format Invalid date and or A non valid date or time Reenter the date in the time was entered on the System month day 4 digit year format Information screen The and or time in the date does not exist e g hour minutes seconds format February 30th Invalid time must be A non valid system time Reenter the time in the hh mm ss was entered on the System hour minutes seconds format Information screen Invalid Already A test was already in No action is needed Active progress when it was selected Invalid Password Login is required and an Try again incorrect password was entered acc
70. providing the management access control can be regained after the timeout expires terminating the test Disable Loopback and pattern tests must be manually terminated Test Duration min Possible Settings 1 120 Default Setting 10 Specifies the maximum duration of user initiated tests Display Conditions This option only appears when Test Timeout is set to Enable 1 120 Sets the Test Timeout period in minutes inclusive Primary Clock Source Possible Settings Net1 Internal Default Setting Net1 Allows you to select the primary clock source for the unit The source selected provides all of the timing within the FrameSaver unit and the clocks for all of the external interfaces Net1 The primary clock is derived from the Network1 interface Internal The primary clock is the internal clock 3 22 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Configuring the Physical Interfaces Characteristics for the following physical interfaces can be configured Network Interface m User Data Port Configuring the Network Interface 9123 A2 GB20 00 When configuring the physical characteristics for the network interface select Physical from the Network menu see Table 3 4 Main Menu Configuration Network Physical Table 3 4 Network Physical Interface Options 1 of 4 Line Framing Format Possible Settings D4 ESF Default Setting ESF Specifies the framing format for transmit
71. second or 16 m for 16 Mbits per second Apply your changes Select the Apply Next button to save your change and bring up the next element to be edited Continue until all newly discovered frame relay elements have been modified before selecting the OK button Select the the OK button The Modify Element dialog box closes Select the OK button at the bottom of the Poller Configuration window The modified elements are saved to the database and the units are polled Allow Network Health to continue polling for about a half an hour to allow time for data to be gathered before running any reports May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Grouping Flements for Reports 9123 A2 GB20 00 Once the discovery process is completed and required changes are made the newly discovered elements DLCls should be organized into a group for Health reporting Grouping makes for easier monitoring and management of similar node types e g all FLEX and SLV elements Once grouped you can then run reports on all DLCls in the network as well as reports on individual DLCls B gt Procedure To group elements 1 From the console select Edit Groups from the Reports menu The Add Groups dialog box opens Enter a name in the Group Name field Up to 64 characters can be entered A through Z a through z O through 9 dashes periods and underscores can be used No spaces can be included
72. source for timing the incoming data External The DTE provides the clock for the transmitted data and the FrameSaver unit uses the interchange circuit DA ITU 113 Transmit Signal Element Timing XTXC DTE source for timing the incoming data Monitor DTR Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether the state of the DTE Ready DTR circuit on the user data port will be used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE When the DTR off condition is detected an alarm is generated LMI is declared down and no further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface Enable Interchange circuit CD ITU 108 1 2 DTR is monitored to determine when valid data is sent from the DTE Disable DTR is not monitored DTR is assumed to be asserted and data Is being transmitted regardless of the state of the lead 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 27 Configuration Table 3 5 Data Port Physical Interface Options 2 of 2 Monitor RTS Control Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Dineen o O O Specifies whether the state of the Request To Send RTS circuits on the user data port will be used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE When the RTS off condition is detected CTS is deasserted LMI is declared down and no further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface Enable Interchang
73. there is an ARP request and when data is sent to the gateway the gateway forwards the data to the appropriate device The gateway acts as an agent for the destination device Enable Proxy ARP is enabled on the port Disable The port cannot be used to acquire the IP address of a FrameSaver unit at the other end of the PVC Configuring the Communication Port 3 58 Select Communication Port from the Management and Communication menu to display or change the communication port configuration options see Table 3 16 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Communication Port Table 3 16 Communication Port Options 1 of 4 Port Use Possible Settings Terminal Net Link Default Setting Terminal Assigns a specific use to the COM port NOTE If the Default IP Destination is set to COM see Table 3 9 Node IP Options and you change Port Use to Terminal the Default IP Destination is forced to None Terminal The COM port is used for the asynchronous terminal connection Net Link The COM port is the network communications link to the IP network or IP device port Data Rate Kbps Possible Settings 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 57 6 115 2 Default Setting 19 2 Specifies the rate for the COM port in kilobits per second 9 6 115 2 kbps Sets the communication port speed May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 16 Communication Port Options 2 of 4
74. will include the selected interval plus interval or time the 3 intervals recorded before it and the 3 intervals recorded after it Occurring on and after a Line 16 The display will include the selected interval plus selected interval or time the 6 intervals recorded after it 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 5 35 Operation and Maintenance 5 36 Line 10 Line 13 ESF Line Performance Statistics Screen Example main status performance esf 9123 C SLV Device Name Node A 3 26 2000 23 32 Network 1 ESF LINE PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Current Interval Timer ESF Error Events Near 123 Far 124 Near 15 Far 12 ES CSS LOFC Time Near Far Near Far Near Far Current 10 37 0 0 0 01 10 35 02 10 20 03 10 05 04 09 50 05 09 35 06 09 20 07 09 05 OD QO O O O O O O OD QO O O O O O O OD QO O O O O O O OD QO O O O O O O OD QO O O O O O O OD QO O O O O O O Worst Interval 24 24 14 14 14 14 Near Tot valid 96 00010 00000 00000 Far Tot valid 96 00010 00000 00000 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Refresh PgDn PgUp ClrFarStats ClrNearStats Select 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 For the ESF line performance statistics the following performance statistics are kept for each 15 minute interval over the past 24 hour period A Near set anda Far set are kept for each statistic The Far set is based on information kept by the unit at the other end of the local loop
75. within multiplexed DLCls that are unique to those DLCls Use a unique EDLCI to identify an individual connection within a multiplexed DLCI Use 0 to identify the primary EDLCI Use 1 62 to identify secondary EDLCls Use the primary EDLCI for customer data which has a higher utilization rate than management data with slightly less line overhead Display Conditions This option does not appear if the DLCI field does not reference a multiplexed DLCI NOTE Clearing the DLCI or changing it to a standard DLCI suppresses EDLCI field 0 62 Specifies the EDLCI number inclusive Primary Link RIP Possible Settings None Proprietary Standard_out Default Setting For multiplexed DLCls Proprietary For nonmultiplexed DLC Is Standard out Specifies which Routing Information Protocol RIP is used to enable routing of management between FrameSaver units and attached equipment None Does not use a routing protocol Proprietary Uses a proprietary variant of RIP version 1 to communicate routing information between FrameSaver units A FrameSaver unit must be on the other end of the link This is the factory default for management PVCs configured on multiplexed DLCls see Table 3 7 DLCI Record Options Standard out The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing information only about FrameSaver FLEX and SLV units in the network This is the factory default for management PVCs configured on standard DLCl
76. 0 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 14 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 2 of 3 Statistic What It Indicates Frame Relay Errors cont d The number of frames received over the Network or Port 1 interface that were less than 5 octets five 8 bit bytes in length Short Rx Frames There may be a non frame relay device on the other end of the link The number of frames received over the Network or Port 1 interface that were more than 8192 octets in length Long Rx Frames The device on the far end of the link may be configured incorrectly Invalid DLCI The number of frames received over the interface that were addressed to DLCls outside the valid range that is a number less than 16 or greater than 1007 The device on the far end of the circuit may have been configured incorrectly or the DLCls configured for the FrameSaver unit may not match the DLCls supplied by the service provider Unknown DLCI The number of frames received over the interface that were addressed to unknown DLCls The DLCI may not have been configured or it has been configured to be Inactive Indicates that the FrameSaver units or devices at both or either end of the circuit have been configured incorrectly Unknown Error The number of frames received over the interface that do not fall into one of the other statistic categories Indicates that the error is not one that the unit can recognize Frame Relay LMI LM
77. 000 D 1 Technical Specifications Table D 1 FrameSaver FLEX 9123 Technical Specifications 2 of 2 Specification COM Port Standard Data rates T1 Network Interface Data rates Services supported Physical interface USA Physical interface Canada Framing format Coding format Line Build Out LBO ANSI PRM Bit stuffing Ethernet Port Standard Data rates Data Port Standard Data rates D 2 May 2000 Criteria 25 position DB25 connector EIA 232 ITU V 24 ISO 2110 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 57 6 and 115 2 kbps 8 position modular unkeyed USOC RJ48C jack Up to 1 536 Mbps Fractional T1 service frame relay service RJ48C CA81A using adapter cable D4 ESF AMI B8ZS 0 0 dB 7 5 dB 15 dB 22 5 dB Selectable AT amp T TR 62411 8 position modular unkeyed USOC RJ45 jack ANSI IEEE Standard 802 3 Ethernet Version 2 10 100 BaseT auto sensing 10 and 100 Mbps Ethernet rates 34 position V 35 connector V 35 ITU ISO 2593 Variations for T1 rates automatically set to the network rate 9123 A2 GB20 00 Equipment List Equipment 9123 A2 GB20 00 See page E 2 for cables you can order Model Feature Description Number FrameSaver FLEX Units FrameSaver FLEX 9123 T1 Remote Site with 16 PVCs and 9123 A1 211 Basic FLEX Feature Set Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 Vac Power Supply Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference FrameSaver FLEX 9123 SLV
78. 123 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Management Link Feature A dedicated troubleshooting management link is available to help service providers isolate device problems within their networks This feature allows Telnet or FTP access to the unit on this link Troubleshooting over this link is essentially transparent to customer operations No alarms or SNMP traps are generated to create nuisance alarms for the customer See Configuring Node IP Information in Chapter 3 Configuration tor additional information about this feature LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature A packet capture utility has been provided to aid with problem isolation when LMI errors are detected Using this utility any enabled frame relay link on the user data port or network interface can be selected The utility captures any LMI packets sent or received and writes them to a data file called Imitrace syc in the system s data directory so the data can be uploaded and transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for analysis The LMI Trace Log also provides access to captured packet information See Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface for additional information on this feature B Procedure To use this utility 1 Select the LMI Packet Capture Utility Main Menu Control gt LMI Packet Capture Utility 2 Select an enabled frame relay link or Capture Interface either Net1 FR1 or Port 1 3 Start packet capture While capturing
79. 2 Drop the connection when the unit drops DTR 250 Force DSR on amp R1 Ignore RTS DO Force CTS on S0 1 Automatically answer incoming calls 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 C 5 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Data Port Connector The following table provides the pin assignments for the 34 position V 35 connector to the DTE 34 Pin Signal ITU CT Direction Socket Shield 101 A Signal Ground Common 102 B Request to Send RTS 105 To DSU In Data Set Ready DSR 107 From DSU Out E Receive Line Signal Detector 109 From DSU Out F RLSD or LSD Data Terminal Ready DTR 108 1 2 To DSU In Local Loopback LL Transmit Data TXD 103 To DSU In Receive Data RXD 104 From DSU Out Transmit Signal Element Timing 113 To DSU In DTE Source XTXC or TT Receive Signal Element Timing 115 From DSU Out DCE Source RXC A B Transmit Signal Element Timing From DSU Out A DCE Source TXC A B Test Mode Indicator TM a From DSU Out NN o H HDn gt Ur o gt sc w XxX lt lt v WST gt Standard V 35 Straight through Cable A standard V 35 straight through cable can be used to connect a DTE port to a DTE where a 34 pin plug type connector is needed for the data port anda 34 position socket type connector is needed for the DTE No special order cables are required C 6 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments E
80. 2 Generally Rising is selected 5 Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to add this alarm 6 Repeat Steps 3 through 5 until all traps are configured for all DLCls Refer to Configuring Alarms in the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide for additional information May 2000 8 9 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Creating History Files Up to 14 additional user history tables can be created in the FrameSaver unit for each interface An interface is a specific DLCI or the entire frame relay interface A table must be created for each DLCI or frame relay link to be monitored Additional user history tables are created using the command line prompt in NetScout Manager Plus to load a file that contains the OlDs Object IDs to be monitored into the unit OpenLane provides several useful examples including three files containing a complete set of OlDs appropriate to the interface to be monitored one for a DLCI one for a frame relay link and one containing system type OIDs Any of these files can be used as a template when creating customized history files specific to the FrameSaver unit These files have a pdn udh user defined history format and are found in the OpenLane netscout userHistory directory The userHistory files should be moved to SNSHOME usr so they can be used A separate udh file must be created and loaded for each DLCI or link that will be monito
81. 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 3 Configures the LMI defined N2 parameter which sets the number of errors that can occur on the LMI link before an error is reported Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies the maximum number of errors LMI Clearing Event N3 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 1 Configures the LMI defined N3 parameter which sets the number of error free messages that must be received before clearing an error event Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies how many error free messages it will take to clear the error event LMI Status Enquiry N1 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 255 Default Setting 6 Configures the LMI defined N1 parameter which sets the number of status enquiry polling cycles that the user side of the LMI initiates before a full status enquiry is initiated Applies to the user side of a UNI only 1 255 Specifies the number of status enquiry polling cycles that can be initiated before a full status enquiry is initiated 3 18 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options 3 of 3 LMI Heartbeat T1 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 10 Configures the LMI defined T1 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages on the user side of the LMI Applies to the user s
82. 6 9 4 7 1 17 1 Total Rx CRC Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxCrcErr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 18 1 Rx Illegal Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxllFrames 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 119 1 Total Tx Errors MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 20 1 Total Rx Errors MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 32 1 Total LMI Errors MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotLMIErrs 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size H Host control index P Protocol index T The time mask B 26 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 14 History OID Cross Reference 5 of 5 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 2 1 N 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 3 1 N Rx Port Burst Octets 1 5 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 4 1 N Tx Port Burst Octets 1 5 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLC number N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size H Host control index P Protocol index T The time mask 9123 A2 GB20 00 Port Burst Upper Limits 1 4 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkUtilUpLimit MIB pdn_FrExt mib
83. 611 exception points Gateway Excess Burst Size Bits Gateway Address Excateiya acting as an agent Error Rate linkDown trap Default Error Rate Threshold General External mans Device controlling access options Modem SNMP management options Com Port options maps Commanas generating reports Transmit Clock glossary grouping elements for reports H faceplate EDR hardware revision NAM fatacaic HDLC errors frame relay statistics advanced FLEX SLV Health and Status basic FLEX messages ald i history field is blank empty Da file transfer adding files protocol installing files 8 12 FR Mode LED 5 5 monitoring DLCI Frame Delivery Ratio FDR 1 7 Hop Frame Relay hyperlink to more information highlighted text assigning time slots configuring interface I nba ICMP IP routing table type isoovery 3 12 Identity displaying 5 y displaying o anan Ignore Control Leads y Wi Kani Inactivity Timeout 3 51 3 60 90S Z7 Initial Route Destination mode 3 9 installation statistics b f NC installation and setup i oU Sai i NetScout Manager Plus rames 3 FT1 Loopback Network Health 9 2 FTP 15 15 40 OpenLane AT installing ae ON Network Health 9 2 initiating a session NG aan a user history files pa A 4 interface user agn Heguirea Ls Interface Status Ethernet port Max Transfer Rate Kbps ease Internal Transmit Clock ession 3 52 4 6 Inverse ARP funct
84. 64 The base rate is 64 kbps Nx56 The base rate is 56 kbps 3 36 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Manually Configuring DLCI Records The Auto Configuration feature automatically configures DLCI Records and their PVC Connections DLCI Records can also be created manually see Table 3 7 Main Menu Configuration Network Data Port DLCI Records Typically DLCI Records only need to be configured when building Management PVCs between the NOC and the central site unit the unit automatically configures non management DLCI Records and PVC Connections To configure these options Service Type on the Easy Install screen must be set to Frame Relay Table 3 7 DLCI Record Options 1 of 3 DLCI Number Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the number for the DLCI in the DLCI record The parameter determines which DLCI record is used for transferring data on a particular frame relay interface DLCI numbers range from 0 to 1023 However the numbers 0 15 and 1008 1023 are reserved Entry of an invalid number results in the error message Value Out of Range 16 1007 If the DLCI number is part of a connection this field is read only NOTES Ifa DLCI number is not entered the DLCI record is not created The DLCI number entered must be unique for the interface Changing settings for this configuration option causes the FrameSaver unit to abort any active frame
85. A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 39 Configuration Configuring PVC Connections The Auto Configuration feature automatically configures PVC Connections and their DLCI Records PVC Connections can also be created manually see Table 3 8 Main Menu Configuration PVC Connections From this screen you can go directly to the Management PVC screen by selecting the MgmtPVCs function key for easy movement between screens Quick removal of unused DLCls included in an existing PVC Connection except for HQ Site is also available when the Delete function key is selected and you respond Yes to the Remove otherwise unused components associated with the deleted PVC prompt To configure these options Service Type on the Easy Install screen must be set to Frame Relay Table 3 8 PVC Connection Options 1 of 2 Source Link Possible Settings Port 1 Net1 FR1 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface that starts a PVC connection the from end of a from to link The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined that are not part of a PVC connection or management link For example if Port 1 has no DLCls defined Port 1 would not appear as a valid setting Port 1 Specifies the user data port as the source link Net1 FR1 Specifies the Network interface or network data port as the source link Clear All Clears all Link
86. C cycle redundancy check errors Tx Total Errors The total number of transmit errors on the interface including transmits discards and transmit overruns Tx Total Discards The total number of transmit discards on the interface including underrun flushes Tx Underruns The number of transmitter underruns too few bits on the interface 5 34 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance ESF Line Performance Statistics These statistics appear when ESF Line is selected from the Performance Statistics menu for the network interface Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics ESF Line Only seven T1 network statistical intervals appear on the screen at any one time You can choose which intervals to display on your screen by entering m Interval Number 01 96 Time Hours and Minutes NOTES Interval 01 is the interval occurring just prior to the current one Interval 02 is 2 intervals prior to the current one etc Selecting a specific time is useful when the approximate time at which a specific event occurred is known Edit any of the interval or time fields on lines 10 13 or 16 When Enter is pressed the values change to the selected range To select intervals You must enter an interval or time on Occurring on and before a__ Line 10 The display will include the selected interval plus selected interval or time the 6 intervals recorded before it Bracketing a selected Line 13 The display
87. Cs A FrameSaver unit can be reset from the OpenLane system Firmware downloading provides an easy to use tool for downloading to an entire network or a portion of the network On demand polling of FrameSaver devices and SNMP polling and reporting are available May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 About the FrameSaver FLEX 9123 NetScout Manager Plus and NetScout Probes 9123 A2 GB20 00 Provides complete LAN and WAN traffic analysis and monitoring functions for FrameSaver devices The following features are supported using this application Thresholds for RMON 1 Remote Monitoring Version 1 alarms and events can be configured m Performance monitoring can be performed using collected RMON 2 Version 2 data NetScout Manager Plus s Protocol Directory and Distribution functionality allows FrameSaver devices to measure up to eleven network layer protocols and report the amount of traffic generated by each In addition it collects performance statistics from FrameSaver devices Up to 900 samples can be stored in 15 minute buckets with 96 buckets in a 24 hour period for up to five days worth of data Optional standalone NetScout Probes can be used with FrameSaver devices at sites where full 7 layer monitoring an unlimited number of protocols and advanced frame capture and decode capabilities are desired May 2000 1 9 About the FrameSaver FLEX 9123 1 10 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 User Interface and Basic Operation Thi
88. Data Port S01P1 frame relay link Port 1 down Primary clock failed Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay link Port 1 LMI down Network T1 frame relay link Net1 FR1 LMI down Network T1 down Unit reset ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh PgUp Up to 12 trap events can be displayed on a screen the most current first Page down PgDn to view less current trap events When no trap events have been logged No Events in Log appears in the Event column ASCII trap strings used to describe trap events are provided in the tables contained in Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps See Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 5 39 Operation and Maintenance FTP File Transfers 5 40 The FrameSaver unit supports a standard File Transfer Protocol FTP server over Transmission Control Protocol TCP A complete binary image of the configuration files can be copied to a host to provide a backup To use this feature the unit must be configured to support Telnet and FTP Sessions Using this feature you can transfer configuration files to from a FrameSaver node program files to a FrameSaver node and User History data from a FrameSaver node through a user data port or the network interface using a management PVC or through the COM port Be aware of the following rules when doing a file transfer You must have Access Level 1 permission to use the put and get commands Ho
89. Destination a Default IP Destination ora TS Access Management Link an Are You Sure prompt appears to warn you To configure these options Service Type on the Easy Install screen must be set to Frame Relay Table 3 10 Management PVC Options 1 of 3 Name Possible Settings ASCII Text Entry Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies a unique name for the management PVC as referenced on screens e g Tampa for the Tampa Florida office ASCII Text Entry Enter a unique name for the management PVC maximum length 8 characters Intf IP Address Possible Settings Node IP Address Special nnn nnn nnn nnn Default Setting Node IP Address Specifies the IP address needed to access the unit via this management PVC providing connectivity to an external IP network through the frame relay network Node IP Address Uses the IP address contained in the Node IP Address see Table 3 9 Node IP Options Special 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Allows you to display edit an IP address for the unit s management PVC when the IP address for this interface is different from the node s IP address May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration pit Subnet Mask Possible Settings Node Subnet Mask Calculate Special nnn nnn nnn nnn Table 3 10 Management PVC Options 2 of 3 Intf Subnet Mask Default Setting Node Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask associated with the IP address that i
90. EE 98 16187 This test sends packets filled with a hexadecimal 55 test pattern and sequence number over the selected interface and DLCI to another FrameSaver device To send a pattern test on a link Main Menu Test gt Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests If the selected And the default DLCI is configured as Then Rate kbps setting is Standard Disruptive appears 100 of CIR after Test Multiplexed Non Disruptive 10 of CIR appears after Test If the CIR is zero the pattern will be sent at a rate of 1000 bps May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting Monitor Pattern This test monitors packets filled with a hexadecimal 55 test pattern and sequence number over the selected interface and DLCI to another FrameSaver device To monitor a pattern test on a link Main Menu Test gt Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests The current number of sequence and data errors are shown under the Result column when the FrameSaver unit is in sync An Out of Sync message appears when 5 frames out of 25 are missing or out of sequence These error counts are updated every second If the maximum count is reached 99999 appears in these fields Connectivity Connectivity is a proprietary method that determines whether the FrameSaver device at the other end of the frame relay PVC is active This test stops automatically and can only be executed for circuit multiplexed PVCs To run a connectivity test on a li
91. FC 1604 RFC 1659 RFC 1757 RFC 2021 right arrow key 2 6 RIP 1 4 8 10 8 61 5 25 proprietary RJ45 Ethernet Port connector RJ48C COM Port connector RJ48C network cable RLB RMON alarm and event defaults Specific Traps Traps 3 56 user history collection router independence setting up to receive RIP Routing Information Protocol RIP 3 61 IP table 5 24 RTS control lead 5 6 running reports RXD control lead 5 6 IN 8 May 2000 S Sampling SLV Inband and Interval saving configuration options screen area function keys area how to navigate scrolling through valid selections security 1 4 P 1 2 2 3 6 SNMP NMS options 3 53 selecting a field from a menu Self Test Results messages Send and monitor test pattern Pattern 6 18 serial number NAM Service A service level management reports verification configuring 3 20 statistics 5 28 Session Access Level 3 51 4 5 4 7 ending starting Set DE setting Date amp Time system clock date and time 3 10 setting up auto configuration 3 11 SNMP trap managers so router can receive RIP SIG LED 5 5 SLA SLM OpenLane performance monitoring feature set 9123 A2 GB20 00 Index SLV Stop Bits 3 59 configuring 3 20 stopping a test Delivery Ratio 3 20 Subnet Mask 3 47 B 57 3 61 DLCI Down on Timeout Node
92. For the DTE iflndex 1 2 17 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps This section describes the FrameSaver unit s compliance with SNMP format standards and with its special operational trap features All traps have an associated string to help you decipher the meaning of the trap Strings associated with an interface with a substring containing ifString have the following format DLCI SdlciNumber circuitld of ifName frame relay link linkName SdlciNumber is the DLCI number DLCI diciNumber Scircuitld only appears when a DLCI is associated with the trap circuitld is the name given to the circuit It can be an empty string or a 1 64 byte string within quotes e g Chicago to New York and only appears when a DLCI with circuitID is associated with the trap linkName is the name given to the link Frame relay SlinkName only appears when a frame relay link has been named and is associated with the trap ifName is the string returned for the SNMP ifName variable Examples DLCI 100 Chicago to New York of Network T1 frame relay link In this example a DLCI and a frame relay link are associated with the trap Typically the circuitld is a coded string encoded by the network service provider The following shows an example DLCI 100 cc0402 dec0704 RG21 of Network T1 frame relay link The unit su
93. For use in Canada Standard EIA 232 Straight Through Cable DB25 to RJ48 14 feet 4 3 meters For connection to an asynchronous terminal or PC with an 8 pin modular interface Standard EIA 232 Straight Through Cable DB25 to D Sub9 14 feet 4 3 meters For connection to a PC with a D Sub9 interface V 35 DTE Adapter EIA 530A to V 35 For connection to equipment with V 35 MS34 connectors Standard EIA 232 D Crossover Cable 14 feet 4 3 meters For connection to an external device May 2000 Part Number 035 0209 2031 035 0221 2031 035 0314 1431 035 0313 1431 035 0244 0031 035 0336 1431 Feature Number 3100 F 1 500 3100 F 1 510 3100 F2 540 3100 F2 550 3100 F 1 570 9008 F 1 550 9123 A2 GB20 00 Index Numbers 55 hexadecimal test pattern A aborting tests Access Dial In 3 62 Easy Name 3 49 Type 3 53 Access Level 4 10 4 11 assigning Port security Session 3 51 adding SLV units to network AIS alarm condition LED linkDown trap Alarm Fail 5 4 adding manually 8 8 conditions configurable thresholds editing LED is lit RMON defaults B 15 using template ALM LED Alternate software revision Annex A and D LMI Protocol ANSI Performance Report Messages ANSI T1 403 Annex B FT1 Channel Loopback ARP inverse Proxy 3 58 assign frame relay time slots synchronous data port time slots and cross connections
94. FrameSaver FLEX 9123 USER S GUIDE Document No 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 KANADINA S Copyright 2000 Paradyne Corporation All rights reserved Printed in U S A Notice This publication is protected by federal copyright law No part of this publication may be copied or distributed transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic manual or otherwise or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Ave N Largo FL 33773 Paradyne Corporation makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Further Paradyne Corporation reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation of Paradyne Corporation to notify any person of such revision or changes Changes and enhancements to the product and to the information herein will be documented and issued as a new release to this manual Warranty Sales Service and Training Information Contact your local sales representative service representative or distributor directly for any help needed For additional information concerning warranty sales service repair installation documentation training distributor l
95. HA Description 5LV Frames Snt Rising Thresh Falling Threshold Reached Community public public Trap Number Check every 4 Edit any trap defaults that may be required See Step 4 of Adding SLV Alarms Manually for field settings you may want to change 5 Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to apply your changes The window closes and the Configuration Manager main window reappears 6 Select the Install button down the center of the Configuration Manager main window to apply your changes Refer to Editing Alarms in the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide to change alarm thresholds May 2000 8 7 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Adding SLV Alarms Manually For FrameSaver units with the SLV and SLM Reporting feature set once DLCls have been discovered SLV alarms should be defined and assigned to each DLCI When configuring alarms manually every alarm must be configured for each DLCI that is if there are eight alarms and 20 DLCls 160 trap configurations must be created 8 x 20 For this reason it is recommended that the OpenLane defaults be used Follow the procedure below to configure alarms manually To load OpenLane default settings for alarms see Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template B Procedure 1 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Ma
96. I Protocol The LMI protocol configured for the frame relay link Normal condition Status Msg Received The number of LMI status messages received over the interface Normal condition Total LMI Errors The number of LMI errors Reliability errors protocol errors unknown report types unknown information elements and sequence errors are included in this total Network problems Number of Inactives The number of times the LMI has declared the frame relay link Inactive Network problems 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 5 33 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 14 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 3 of 3 Statistic What It Indicates Frame Relay HDLC Errors Rx Total Errors The number of receiver errors on the interface The following are included in this count m Receive invalid frames short frames long frames invalid DLCls unknown DLCls and unknown errors m Rx Total Discards m Receive errors non octet aligned frames frames with CRC errors and Rx Overruns Rx Total Discards The number of receiver discards on the interface The following are included in this count Resource errors Rx Overruns Frames received when the link was down Inactive and disconnected DLCls Inactive destination DLCls Unknown EDLCls Rx Overruns The number of receiver overruns too many bits on the interface Rx Non Octet Frames The number of non octet frames received on the interface Rx CRC Errors The number of received CR
97. IB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciStsInactiveSecs MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyAvg MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyMax MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyPacketSz MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtFrameSzUpLimit MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtFrameSzCount B 25 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 14 History OID Cross Reference 4 of 5 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 21 D N Burst Upper Limit 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtBurstUpLimit 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 3 D N Burst Octets 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtBurstOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 4I D N Burst Frames 1 5 MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtBurstFrames 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 2 1 LMI Unavailable Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkNoLMISecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 6 l Rx Short Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxShort 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 7 1 Rx Long Frames MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxLong 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 11 1 LMI Sequence Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkSeqErr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 15 1 Rx Discards MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxDiscards 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2
98. IS is an unframed all ones signal Possible reasons include Upstream FrameSaver unit is transmitting AIS keep alive signal m The network is transmitting an AIS Auto Configuration Active Auto Configuration feature is active which allows automatic configuration and cross connection of DLCls as they are reported by the network LMI Back to Back Mode Active The operating mode has been configured for back to back operation Main Menu Control gt Change Operating Mode The FrameSaver unit can be connected to another FrameSaver unit without a frame relay switch between them This feature is useful for product demonstrations or for a point to point configuration using a leased line CTS down to Port 1 Device The user data port CTS control lead on the FrameSaver unit is off DLCI nnnn Down The DLCI for the specified frame relay link is down frame relay link 1 2 DTR Down from Port 1 Device The DTR control lead from the device connected to the user data port is deasserted EER at Network 1 The error rate of the received network signal exceeds the currently configured threshold This condition only occurs if the network interface is configured for ESF framing This condition clears when the error rate falls below the threshold value which may take up to 15 minutes nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the ne
99. Inband communications are used to pass frames that calculate latency as well as transmission success and other SLV information 10 3600 Sets the SLV Sample Interval secs in seconds SLV Delivery Ratio Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether communication of Frame and Data Delivery Ratios FDR DDR between FrameSaver FLEX and SLV devices is enabled To use this capability both ends of all PVCs must be FrameSaver FLEX or SLV devices If some of the units are FrameSaver 9124s or 9624s they must be running software version 1 2 or higher Enable An extra byte for FDR DDR statistics collection is included with each frame which is used at the receiving end to determine the amount of data dropped by the network Disable Extra byte is not included DLCI Down on SLV Timeout Available Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable DLCI Down on SLV Timeout S O Banano ae Determines whether missed SLV packets will be monitored along with the LMI status to determine the status of PVC connections to remote FrameSaver units NOTE This option does not apply to multiplexed DLCIs connected to a far end unit with hardware bypass capability Enable After the configured threshold for missed SLV packets has been exceeded causing the DLCl s status to turn Inactive an alarm and SNMP trap are generated and a Health and Status message created Disable Missed SLV packets are monit
100. LI Port 2 99 16284 CAUTION This test may affect the operation of the frame relay PVCs assigned to the port Any IP data being sent while this test is active Will be disrupted 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 6 27 Troubleshooting IP Ping Test An IP Ping test can be run to test connectivity between the FrameSaver unit and any FrameSaver unit router or NMS to which it has a route In addition the test can be run to access a remote unit for configuration purposes Times when you might want to run an IP Ping test are m To test connectivity between the FrameSaver unit and any FrameSaver unit in the network to verify that the path is operational Select Procedure 1 to ping any far end FrameSaver unit m To verify the entire path between a newly installed remote site FrameSaver unit and the central site NMS During a remote site installation an IP Ping test is typically run from the remote site to ping the NMS at the central site The remote FrameSaver unit must have SNMP trap managers configured and one of those trap managers must be the central site NMS Select Procedure 2 to ping the NMS at the central site m To test the path to the NMS trap managers during installation of the central site FrameSaver unit The remote FrameSaver unit must have configured the SNMP trap managers to be sent the ping Select Procedure 2 to ping the SNMP trap managers To remotely complete setup of a FrameSaver unit following its physical installatio
101. LM application It will prompt you for the serial numbers of the units to be activated their IP addresses and whether the activations will be immediate or scheduled OpenLane then activates SLV capability in the designated units and the units are reset A report summary will be available that provides information about the activation certificate the activated units and the number of license keys remaining The following table summarizes the features that are included in the two feature sets See Basic FLEX Features and Advanced FLEX SLV Features for additional Information Feature Set Basic Advanced Feature FLEX FLEX SLV Physical and frame relay performance statistics SLV performance statistics e g FDR DDR latency CIR EIR relationships Trap Log Multiplexed user data DLCls Troubleshooting DLCI for remote management Layer 2 data link diagnostics nondisruptive DLCI loopbacks PVC Burst Table User history available via SNMP RMON2Z polling User history available via FTP RMON alarms and proactive alarm thresholds OpenLane SLM system real time applications Limited no SLM OpenLane SLM system historical reports and graphs No Yes Layer 3 network Top Talkers No No NetScout Manager Plus support Limited Limited alarms and alarms and history only history only May 2000 1 3 About the FrameSaver FLEX 9123 Basic FLEX Features The FrameSaver FLEX 9123 unit provides the followin
102. LMI state on the network interface That is Port 1 s LMI follows the network interface s LMI This setting is useful if the router connected to Port 1 is used to initiate recovery when network failures are detected Port 1 Codependent with Net1 FR1 Brings LMI down on the network interface when LMI on Port 1 goes down or LMI down on Port 1 when LMI on the network interface goes down and allows LMI to come back up when LMI comes back on the other interface That is the LMI state for one interface is dependent on the other Use this setting when backup is through the router instead of the unit It is notrecommended since it makes fault isolation more difficult 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 17 Configuration Table 3 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options 2 of 3 Traffic Policing Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Ca Determines whether or not CIR Committed Information Rate and EIR Excess Information Rate will be enforced by the unit on frames being sent on network frame relay links Enable CIR and EIR are enforced Frames that exceed CIR will be marked Discard Eligible DE These frames are counted in the Above CIR but within EIR category until this category is full Once full additional frames are counted as being in the Within CIR category Frames in excess of EIR will be discarded Disable CIR and EIR are not enforced LMI Error Event N2 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4
103. Loopback on the synchronous data port B Procedure To send and monitor a Pattern Test 1 Select Network Physical Tests Main Menu gt Test Network Physical Tests 2 Select the desired pattern in the Send or Monitor field If sending monitoring a user defined pattern enter the the desired 2 byte hexadecimal value in the field next to Send or Monitor When sending a pattern the Inject ERR function key appears Use Inject ERR if you want to inject a bit error in the transmitted bit pattern 3 Highlight the Send command to send a pattern or the Start command to monitor a pattern and press Enter to start the test or start monitoring it 4 View the length of time that the test has been running in the Results column An error count is also displayed When monitoring a pattern the ResetMon virtual function key appears ResetMon resets the error count to zero 5 Highlight Stop and press Enter to stop the test 6 View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column 6 26 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting DTE Loopback The local DTE external Loopback DTLB test loops the received signal on the DTE interface back to the DTE without affecting the operation of the remaining ports Use this test to isolate problems on the user data port Main Menu gt Test Data Port Physical Tests An attached device or test equipment must generate the data to be looped back ag User Data DTLB PA
104. MON Alarm Defaults Object ID Cross References Numeric Order The FrameSaver unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event information Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor When the threshold set for the monitored variable is exceeded an SNMP trap is sent and or a log entry is made This table is helpful in identifying alarm conditions being tracked when viewing the NetScout Custom History screen shown below which provides the OID instead of the alarm condition NetScout Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 NetScout Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 Interval 60 Seconds File View Format 0 11 00 16 11 05 16 11 10 17 11 15 17 11 20 16 11 25 16 Wed Oct 21 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 10 301 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 4 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 5 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 18 10 301 See Table B 14 for an RMON history OID cross reference and Table B 15 for an RMON alarm OID cross reference B 22 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 14 History OID Cross Reference 1 of 5 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 2 1 22 11 2 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 5 1 Link Speed MIB MIB II RFC 1573 Tag ifSpeed 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 10 1 All DLCI LMI Rx Octets MIB MIB II RFC 1573 Tag ifInOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 16 1 All DLCI LMI Tx Octets MIB MIB II RFC 1573
105. NMP Management options Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate Set the configuration option Assign SNMP community names Community Name 1 and Community Name 2 to a community name text up to 255 characters in length Assign the type of access allowed Name 1 Access and Name 2 Access to Read for the SNMP community names or Read Write 3 Save your changes See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about General SNMP Management configuration options 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 4 9 Security and Logins Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses An additional level of security is provided by Limiting the IP addresses of NMSs that can access the FrameSaver unit Performing validation checks on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to access the FrameSaver unit Specifying the access allowed for the authorized NMS when IP address validation is performed The SNMP NMS Security Options screen provides the configuration options that determine whether security checking is performed on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to communicate with the unit Make sure that SNMP Management is set to Enable Menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration s Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management SNMP Management E
106. OM port is down and the COM port is configured for Net Link OOF at Network 1 An Out of Frame OOF condition is detected on the network interface Possible reasons include Incompatible framing format between the network and the FrameSaver unit m Network cabling problem m 11 facility problem 2 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 5 15 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 7 Health and Status Messages 3 of 3 Message What It Indicates Primary Clock Failed A failure of the primary clock source configured for the unit is detected and the unit s internal clock is providing the timing This condition clears when the configured primary clock is restored SLV Timeout DLCI nnmn An excessive number of SLV communication frame relay link 1 2 3 responses from the remote FrameSaver SLV unit have been missed on the specified multiplexed DLCI the DLCI is not suitable for user data When a hardware bypass capable device has been detected at the other end of the PVC and this condition occurs only user data for EDLCI 0 will be transmitted while this condition exists Two Level 1 Users Accessing Two Level 1 users are already using the menu Device driven user interface only two sessions can be active at one time Time Slot Discovery in Pro
107. P Protocol index T The time mask B 24 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 14 History OID Cross Reference 3 of 5 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 57 1 D 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 59 1 D 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 61 1 D 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 63 1 D 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 2 1 D 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 5 1 D 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 6 1 D 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 8 1 D 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 2 1 N 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 3 1 N 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number Network Frames Dropped Above CIR Within EIR Network Frames Offered Above EIR Network Frames Dropped Above EIR DLCI EIR Inactive Seconds Average Latency Maximum Latency Latency Packet Size Frame Size Upper Limit 1 5 Frame Size Count 1 5 N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size H Host control index P Protocol index T The time mask 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDIciRxFrNetDrop CirToEir MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciOfferedFrOverEir MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDIciRxFrNetDrop OverEir MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciEir M
108. PVCname Specifies a name for the management PVC Only appears when a management PVC name is defined for the node For example when the network is connected to a remote device located in the London office London can be specified as the PVC name which is the link between the local FrameSaver unit and the one located in London London would appear as one of the available selections 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 43 Configuration Table 3 9 Node IP Options 2 of 3 TS Access Management Link Available Settings None PVCname Default Setting None Specifies a troubleshooting management link for the special needs of network service providers Display Conditions This option only appears when Service Type on the Easy Install screen is set to Frame Relay If the setting is changed from the management PVC name to None the Delete the Management PVC PVCname and the associated DLCI Record prompt appears If you select No The link designation is removed and the option is set to None m Yes The link designation is removed and the option is set to None and the link and its DLCI will be deleted None Disables or does not specify a TS Access Management Link PVCname Specifies the name of the TS Management PVC Display Conditions This selection only appears when a dedicated management PVC has been defined on the network frame relay link as a DLCI with DLCI Type set to Standard TS Management Link Access Level
109. Settings None DLCI nnnn Default Setting None Specifies whether a special troubleshooting link is set up for the service provider If it has it specifies the virtual circuit that will be used Display Conditions This option only appears when Service Type on the Easy Install screen is set to Leased Line None Disables or does not specify a special troubleshooting link If the setting is changed from a DLCI number to None the Delete the associated DLCI Record prompt appears If you select m No The special troubleshooting link designation is removed and the option is set to None m Yes The special troubleshooting link designation is removed and the option is set to None In addition all management PVCs and DLCI records associated with the link will be deleted If a deleted management PVC was also an Initial Route Destination see Table 3 14 SNMP Traps Options or a Default IP Destination these options are reset to their default settings DLCI 16 1007 Allows you to establish a specific troubleshooting link that can be used by the service provider when needed If the designated DLCI number is changed the Delete the associated DLCI Record prompt appears If you select m No The special troubleshooting link designation is removed and the option is set to None m Yes The special troubleshooting link designation is removed and the option is set to None In addition all management PVCs and DLCI records a
110. Size bytes SLV Synchronization Role Function Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Keys Area Save Message Area Screen Format Description Menu Path Menu selections made to reach the current screen Device Name Customer assigned identification of the FrameSaver unit FrameSaver unit s model number 9123 m This is a remote site unit that supports 16 PVCs and has only the basic FLEX feature set the basic FLEX feature set 9123 SLV m This is a remote site unit that supports 16 PVCs and has both the basic FLEX and the advanced FLEX SLV feature sets installed 9123 C This is acentral site unit that supports 64 PVCs and has only 9123 C SLV m This is a central site unit that supports 64 PVCs and has both the basic FLEX and the advanced FLEX SLV feature sets installed 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 2 5 User Interface and Basic Operation Screen Format Description Screen Area Selection display and input fields for monitoring and maintaining the FrameSaver unit Function Keys Area Specific functions that can be performed by pressing a specified key then pressing Enter Message Area System related information and valid settings for input fields in the lower left corner System and Test Status messages in the lower right corner Navigating the Screens You can navigate the screens by m Using keyboard keys Switching between the two screen work areas using
111. Statistics Physical and link layer statistics Layers 1 and 2 are collected on the port The following menu shows the performance statistics that can be selected Performance Statistics Menu main status performance 9123 C SLV Device Name Node A 3 26 2000 23 32 PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Service Level Verification DLCI Frame Relay ESF Line Ethernet Clear All Statistics Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu 5 26 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Clearing Performance Statistics Performance statistics counters can be reset to the baseline when using a directly connected asynchronous terminal and your security Access Level is Level 1 This feature is useful when troubleshooting problems Statistic counters are not actually cleared using this feature True statistic counts are always maintained so SLAs can be verified and they can be viewed from an SNMP NMS However since statistics can be cleared locally the statistics viewed via the menu driven user interface may be different from those viewed from the NMS B Procedure To clear all statistics Performance Statistics Clear All Statistics B gt Procedure To clear specific sets of statistics m Use the ClrSLV amp DLCIStats function key to reset the SLV and DLCI performance statistic counters for the currently displayed DLCI from one of the following screens Performance Statistics Service Level Verification P
112. TS management link 4 4 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Security and Logins Limiting Telnet Access Telnet access can be limited by Disabling Telnet access completely Requiring a login for Telnet sessions that are not on the TS Management Link m Assigning an access level for Telnet sessions Disabling TS Management Link access To limit Telnet access via a service provider s troubleshooting management link see Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link B Procedure To limit Telnet access when the session is not on the TS Management Link 1 Select the Telnet and FTP Session options Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable Telnet access Telnet Session to Disable Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login Assign an access level Session Access Level to Level 2 or Level 3 NOTE Regardless of a user s login access level a user cannot operate at a level higher than the access level specified for the Telnet session e g if a user has a Level 1 login and Level 2 telnet access has been set the Level 1 user can only operate as a Level 2 user If you are going to allow users to configure the unit keep the access at Level 1 3 Save your changes See Conf
113. a Login May 2000 4 1 Security and Logins Limiting Access The FrameSaver unit provides access security on the following interfaces m Asynchronous async terminal Telnet m FIP SNMP Up to two direct or Telnet sessions can be active at any given time that is you can have two simultaneous Telnet sessions or one Telnet session and one active asynchronous terminal session or two simultaneous asynchronous terminal sessions Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access Direct asynchronous terminal access to the menu driven user interface can be limited by Requiring a login m Assigning an access level to the port or interface See Configuring the Communication Port in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about communication COM port configuration options 4 2 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Security and Logins B gt Procedure To limit asynchronous terminal access to the menu driven user interface 1 Select the Communication Port options Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication gt Communication Port 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login Limit the effective access level to Port Access Level to Level 2 or Level 3 Level 3 or Level 2 NOTE Regardless of a user s login access level a user c
114. a login to access a Telnet session Disable Does not require a login 3 50 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 12 Telnet and FTP Session Options 2 of 3 Session Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies the highest security level allowed when accessing the menu driven user interface via a Telnet session If a login is required for the session the effective access level is also determined by the user s access level When a login is not required the effective access level is determined by this option This option does not affect the TS Access Management Link NOTE The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the session or the user For example if the assigned Session Access Level is Level 2 but the User Access Level is Level 3 then only level 3 access is allowed for the session Level 1 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information change configuration options and run tests This is the highest access level allowed CAUTION Before changing the session access level to Level 2 or 3 make sure that the COM port s Port Access Level is set to Level 1 and that at least one Login ID is set to Level 1 Otherwise access will be lost If this occurs you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the configuration process again A reset is required if
115. able 3 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options Table 3 2 Service Level Verification Options Table 3 3 General System Options Table 3 4 Network Physical Interface Options Table 3 5 Data Port Physical Interface Options Table 3 6 Interface Frame Relay Options Table 3 7 DLCI Record Options Table 3 8 PVC Connection Options Table 3 9 Node IP Options Table 3 10 Management PVC Qptions Table 3 11 General SNMP Management Options Table 3 12 Telnet and FTP Session Options Table 3 13 SNMP NMS Security Options Table 3 14 SNMP Traps Options Table 3 15 Ethernet Port Options Table 3 16 Communication Port Options Table 3 17 External Modem COM Port Options Configuring the Overall System The System menu includes the following Frame Relay and LMI Service Level Verification General May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System Select Frame Relay and LMI from the System menu to display or change the Frame Relay and LMI options for the entire system see Table 3 1 Main Menu 5 Configuration gt System Frame Relay and LMI To configure these options Service Type on the Easy Install screen must be set to Frame Relay See Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface to set an interface s frame relay options Table 3 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options 1 of 3 LMI Behavior Possible Settings Independent Port 1 Follows Net1 FR1 Net1 FR1 Follows Port 1 Port 1 Codepen
116. access level to Level 2 or 3 make sure that the Telnet Session Access Level is set top Level 1 and at least one Login ID is set to Level 1 Otherwise access will be lost If this occurs you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the configuration process again Level 2 Allows limited access and control of the device The user can monitor and perform diagnostics display status and configuration option information Level 3 Allows limited access with monitoring control only The user can monitor and display status and configuration screens only Inactivity Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether a user session is disconnected after a specified time of inactivity no keyboard activity Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Enable Disconnects user session after the specified time of inactivity Disable Does not disconnect user session Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1 60 Default Setting 10 Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity that can elapse before the session is disconnected Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal 1 60 Sets the time from 1 to 60 minutes inclusive May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 16 Communication Port Options 4 of 4 IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default S
117. acks on a Frame Relay Link 6 25 Send and Monitor Pattern Tests 0a 6 26 LIE tv AA UNA BAWA KOK HADUNNG PIYE ANU ee maga nee 6 27 E PF PING ee TERENA eee 6 28 E LU bha ea a eh K AAKALA KGAD BARA ee ens eee hes 6 30 7 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices iv m OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices 7 1 m Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System aa 7 2 m Setting Up FrameSaver FLEX and SLV Support 7 3 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Contents 8 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices E PDI 3p k nah bbs dhe oh cds KABAN A ND hA ABAKA 8 2 Configuring NetScout Manager Plus 2 0 8 3 Adding FrameSaver FLEX Units to the NetScout Manager Plus NEN cans oa bre eae needa MA BAK ee bean rors Gian wees Na DID 8 4 Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template 00 00 00 e eee 8 5 EN EIS du dat deen E tees eee oe eteRttoan nes 8 6 Adding SLV Alarms Manually 00 e cece eee ees 8 8 Creating History Files AA AA 8 10 Installing the User Defined History Files 8 12 Monitoring a DLCl s History Data 0 0 ccc eee 8 13 m Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus 8 16 9 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices m Installation and Setup of Network Health aaa 9 2 m Discovering FrameSaver Elements cece eee eens 9 3 Configur
118. acquire the IP address of a FrameSaver unit at the other end of the PVC Standard RIP Routing Information Protocol allows the router to automatically learn the routes to all FrameSaver units connected to that FrameSaver unit Security Provides multiple levels of security to prevent unauthorized access to the unit May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 9123 A2 GB20 00 About the FrameSaver FLEX 9123 Auto Configuration Provides the following automatic configuration features Time Slot Discovery For automatic configuration of all network DSO assignments Frame Relay Discovery For automatic discovery of network DLCls and configuration of a user data port DLCls the PVC connection and a management PVC which is multiplexed with user data DLCls LMI Protocol Discovery For automatic configuration of the protocol being used by the network DLCI Deletion For automatic removal of configuration of unused DLCIs from the unit s configuration and statistical databases CIR Determination For automatic recalculation of the committed rate measurement interval Tc and excess burst size Be when a DLCI s CIR changes Excess burst size Be and committed burst size Bc are recalculated when Committed Burst Size Bc Bits is set to CIR The committed rate measurement interval Tc is recalculated when Committed Burst Size Bc Bits is set to Other Configurable FTP Transfer Rate Allows you to control the transmit rate used for downlo
119. ading from the FrameSaver unit and uploading user history Statistics to an NMS Network Management System via the COM port connection or a management PVC so the data can be transferred as a background task using the standard File Transfer Protocol FTP over extended periods of time using low bandwidth Dual Flash Memory Allows software upgrades while the unit is up and running Two software loads can be stored and implemented at the user s discretion Multiplexed Management PVCs Provides a method of multiplexing management data with customer data transparently over a single PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit when FrameSaver devices are at each end of the circuit This feature also makes it possible to run nondisruptive PVC tests Maximum Number of PVCs and Management PVCs Supported Models 9123 A1 211 9123 A1 213 Feature 9123 A1 221 9123 A1 223 64 Through Connections PVCs 16 Dedicated Management PVCs 2 ATM VPI VCI and DLCI Correlation For networks with both ATM and frame relay access endpoints allows the FrameSaver unit to report the originating Virtual Path and Channel Identifier VPI VCI in the far end ATM access endpoint where the local DLCI is mapped This occurs when the FrameSaver unit is operating in frame relay mode May 2000 1 5 About the FrameSaver FLEX 9123 Frame Relay Traffic Policing Ensures proper alignment and correlation of CIR Committed Information Rate values between the FrameSaver unit and th
120. ag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default TX Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 60 secs None Must be eeeedngd is Tag devErExtDieitxFroutcin lt comnguied OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 1 D Tx CIR Utilization MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs Must be RFC 2115 1 min configured Tag frCircuitSentOctets OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 Lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number Table B 13 Dynamic DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area Rising Falling Threshold Threshold MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Default Default Rx DLCI Link MIB FR DTE MIB 70 of link 65 of link Utilization RFC 2115 capability capability Tag frCircuitReceivedOctets OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 9 1 D Tx DLCI Link MIB FR DTE MIB 70 of link 65 of link Utilization RFC 2115 capability capability Tag frCircuitSentOctets OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 Lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 B 21 SNMP MIBs and Traps and R
121. alid interface number for a FrameSaver 9123 model is 101015001 4 Edit the new file as needed Refer to Creating UDH Files and Using Custom History in the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional information See Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Default for OID information for an interface May 2000 8 11 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Installing the User Defined History Files Once the user defined history files have been created the files need to be installed History files are installed from the command line prompt in NetScout Manager Plus Should the FrameSaver unit be reset these files will need to be reinstalled The command used to install a new user history table is located in SNSHOME bin CAUTION Do not use user_history_table_1 or 2 UserHistory1 and UserHistory2 are the default user history files used to keep FLEX and SLV data for reports Editing either of these files will destroy FLEX and SLV reporting capability B gt Procedure 1 Type dvuhist f agentname user_history_table_number config number of buckets interval download file udh to load user defined history files for the frame relay link Example dvuhist f Dallas51 3 config 30 60 Dallasbik udh The interval must be entered in seconds Type dvuhist f agentname DLCI number user history table number config number of buckets interval download file udh to load user defined history files for a specific
122. an agent or DLCI May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices B Procedure 1 9123 A2 GB20 00 Select the Traffic radio button to monitor the newly added agent or one of its DLCls Highlight an agent in the agent list box so that its DLCls appear in the DLCI list box under the agent list box If you want to monitor one of the agents DLCls highlight the DLCI to be monitored Click on an applicable icon The selected graphical report should open Traffic icons that would be of particular interest are Traffic Monitor and Domain History In the example below the Domain History icon was selected which is actually a real time report Net5cout RMON History Grenada43 File View Format Refresh Applications NetScout RMON History Grenadad3 Utilization 11 17 02 11 28 06 11 34 15 11 40 24 Mon Sep 14 NOTE If Size Distribution is the selected View and distribution size has been changed via OpenLane the values shown for the distribution will not be accurate Only default size distributions are tracked May 2000 8 17 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices 8 18 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices FrameSaver units are compatible with Concord Communication s Network Health software For FrameSaver units with the SLV and SLM reporting feature set Network Health has released the first in a series of software module
123. and DLCI settings and suppresses EDLCIs Source DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the source DLCI for a frame relay interface The DLCI must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection NOTE Source DLCI has no value if Source Link contains no value 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI number Source EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the source Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCI for a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection Display Conditions This option only appears when Source DLCI contains a multiplexed DLCI record number 0 62 Specifies the EDLCI number 3 40 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 8 PVC Connection Options 2 of 2 Destination Link Possible Settings Net1 FR1 Default Setting Initially blank no default Destination Link Specifies the frame relay interface used as the destination link the to end of a from to link The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined which are not part of a PVC connection or management link For example if the network interface has no DLCls defined Net1
124. and is only available when ANSI performance report messages are enabled in the unit Summary information that appears near the top of the screen includes Near Far Current Interval Timer Contains the number of seconds that have elapsed in the current 15 minute interval for the near or far information which can show a value up to 900 seconds Near Far ESF Error Events Maintains a count of ESF error events as specified by AT amp T TR 54016 which counts CRC and OOF events A maximum of 65 535 error events can be counted Once 65535 is reached it stays at that number until the network issues a reset command May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance The following performance statistics are collected for ESF line conditions Statistic What It Indicates Errored Seconds ES Any second with one or more ESF Error events Unavailable Seconds Any second in which service is unavailable Begins UAS incrementing at the onset of 10 consecutive seconds of severely errored seconds SES and stops incrementing after 10 consecutive seconds of no SESs Severely Errored Any second with 320 or more CRC errors or one or more Seconds SES Out Of Frame OOF events Bursty Errored Any second with more than one but less than 320 CRC errors Seconds BES Controlled Slip Any second with one or more controlled slips a replication or Seconds CSS deletion of a DS1 frame by the receiving device This is collected for ne
125. and updates due to LMI response messages are performed according to the previously saved setting Automatically Removing a Circuit 3 14 Using the automatic circuit removal feature which comes enabled network DLCls and PVCs can be automatically removed from the unit s configuration when the the network service provider no longer supports them Automatic deletion is based upon information from a LMI full status response on an active frame relay link When this feature is set to Enable The following will be automatically removed from the unit s configuration Unsupported network DLCls and PVC connections that include multiplexed network DLCls Unsupported standard network DLCls that are not configured as the primary destination in a management PVC Non management PVCs in which unsupported standard network DLCls are included DLCls not included in three consecutive LMI full status response messages LMI status responses that indicate a Deleted status for the DLCI All configured options relating to the deleted circuits are also deleted and they revert to their default settings A DLCI will not be deleted if the physical interface or frame relay link is down or if the DLCI is used for the TS Management Link Disable Unused network DLCls PVC connections and management PVCs must be manually removed May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Setting Up Back to Back Operation Using this spec
126. ank when the unit times out Press Enter to reactivate the interface B gt Procedure To log in when security is being enforced 1 Type your assigned Login ID and press Enter 2 Type your Password and press Enter Valid characters All printable ASCII characters Number of characters Up to 10 characters can be entered in the Login ID and Password fields Case sensitive Yes An asterisk appears in the password field for each character entered May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 User Interface and Basic Operation If your login was Then the Main Menu appears see page 2 4 Begin your session NOTE If your login is valid but access is denied there are two currently active sessions Invalid Message Invalid Password appears on line 24 and the Login screen is redisplayed After three unsuccessful attempts A Telnet session is closed The User Interface Idle screen appears for a directly connected terminal or modem An SNMP trap is generated Access is denied See your system administrator to verify your login Login ID Password combination FrameSaver units support two sessions simultaneously If two sessions are currently active wait and try again m f two sessions are currently active and you are attempting to access the unit through Telnet the local Telnet client process returns a Connection refused message at the bottom of the screen m f two sessions are currently act
127. annot operate at a level higher than the access level specified for the port e g if a user has a Level 1 login and Level 2 port access has been set the Level 1 user can only operate as a Level 2 user If you are going to allow Level 1 users to configure the unit keep the access at Level 1 NOTE See Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication in Chapter 6 Troubleshooting should you be locked out inadvertently 3 Save your changes 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 4 3 Security and Logins Controlling External COM Port Device Access Dial in access can be controlled when an external device modem is connected to the unit s communication COM port The External Device Commands option must be set to AT B gt Procedure To control dial in access 1 Select the External Modem options Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication gt External Modem Com Port 2 Enable the Dial In Access configuration option This option only appears when the External Device Commands option is set to AT 3 Save your change See Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about external device communication port configuration options Controlling Telnet or FTP Access The FrameSaver unit provides several methods for limiting access via a Telnet or FTP session Telnet or FTP access can be on a standard management link or on a service provider s troubleshooting
128. ares an EER if more than 921 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 922 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 6 Declares an EER if more than 92 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 10 3 or 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 93 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 7 Declares an EER if more than 9 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 10 8 or 10 3 or 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 10 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 8 Declares an EER if more than 41 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute intervals or a 1077 10 8 10 7 10 4 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 42 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 9 Declares an EER if more than 4 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute intervals or a 1078 1077 10 8 10 9 or 10 4 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 5 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period Circuit Identifier Possible Settings Text Field Clear Default Setting blank Identifies the transmission vendor s circuit information to facilitate troubleshooting Text Field Edit or display circuit identifier information maximum 255 characters Clear Removes the circuit identifier information 3 26 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Configuring the User Data Port Select Phy
129. arrow key so the cursor is on Configuration Press Enter to display the Configuration menu The Load Configuration From menu appears NOTE Loading a configuration with many DLCls from a unit s Customer Configuration 1 or 2 option area may take time Allow a minute or more for the file to be loaded Select the configuration option area from which you want to load configuration options and press Enter Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 or Default Factory Configuration The selected set of configuration options is loaded into the configuration edit area and the Configuration Edit Display menu appears This sequence of steps would be shown as the menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration May 2000 3 5 Configuration Changing Configuration Options B gt Procedure To change configuration option settings 1 From the Configuration Edit Display menu select a set of configuration options and press Enter For example Configuration PVC Connections 2 Select the configuration options that are applicable to your network and make appropriate changes to the setting s See Chapter 2 User Interface and Basic Operation for additional information When creating new PVC connections or management PVCs some configuration options will be blank For a valid setting to appear Tab to the configuration option and press the spacebar 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until all changes are c
130. at were between the committed information rate and excess information rate DLCI of the frame relay link that were above the excess information rate The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with the discard eligible bit set The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with backward explicit congestion notifications The number of frames and octets received on the selected BECNs are sent to notify users of data traffic congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with forward explicit congestion notifications The network sends FECNs to notify users of data traffic congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the FECN indicator Only appears for units with the FLEX SLV feature set May 2000 5 31 Operation and Maintenance Frame Relay Performance Statistics 5 32 The following statistics appear when Frame Relay is selected from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics Frame Relay All counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached 232 2 then the count starts over The NextLink and PrevLink function keys only appear when multiple frame relay links have been configured This screen only appears when Service Type is set to Frame Relay
131. ation and Setting the System Clock 3 10 m Setting Up Auto Configuration cc eens 3 11 Selecting a Frame Relay Discovery Mode 3 12 Automatically Removing a Circuit cc eee 3 14 m Setting Up Back to Back Operation aaa 3 15 Changing Operating Mode 2 620 ceckctccessndhscueensedessumeds 3 15 Configuration Option Tables nasaan anaana ananena 3 16 Configuring the Overall System n nananana a 3 16 Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System 3 17 Configuring Service Level Verification Options 3 20 Configuring General System Options 3 22 Configuring the Physical Interfaces AA 3 23 Configuring the Network Interface eee ee eee 3 23 Configuring the User Data Port ce cee eee 3 27 Assigning Time Slots Cross Connections 0 asarna nnn 3 29 Assigning Frame Relay Time Slots to the Network Interface 3 29 Assigning the Synchronous Data Port to Network Time Slots 3 32 Clearing Assignments waaah NANA Wa NPA PARE NAAT 3 33 Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface 3 34 m Manually Configuring DLCI Records aaa 3 37 m Configuring PVC Connections a 3 40 m Setting Up Management and Communication Options 3 42 Configuring Node IP Information wc nn ma ma WA BENG HANG KKK KA
132. aulty Summary Reports Provide summary information for the network volume and error leaders and DLCI traffic Network Summary Report Provides an overall view of the network Use this report for planning and to predict when a DLCI might run into problems Leaders Summary Report Identifies DLCIs having the highest volume and errors High traffic volume may be increasing latency and the high Health Index rating indicates problems It is a good idea to run these reports daily so a norm can be established The same DLCls should appear Use this chart and table to alert you to possible problems Problems to look for include a normally high volume DLCI is dropped from the list a new DLCI appears on the list check Element Summaries a DLCI has a high Health Index rating but low volume significant differences between a DLCI s average and peak Health Index rating May 2000 9 7 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Elements Summary Report Compares DLCI traffic with volume and the baseline bandwidth utilization and errors Use this report for DLCI detail information and comparison to identify DLC ls with above or below average volume so they can be investigated when there are any significant changes Supplemental Report Shows DLCI availability and latency The information shown in this report is also on other Health reports However these charts show more than ten DLCls at a time so you h
133. ave a broader view of the service provided by the network Service Level Reports Provide summary information for a group list for a longer reporting period than other reports Executive Service Level Report Provides service level performance for an enterprise on a single page Use this report to assess whether IT service levels are meeting availability and service goals IT Manager Service Level Report Provides service level information for various groups Using this report you can compare service level performance of various groups The report summarizes service levels for a group of DLCls along with details on individual DLC ls within that group Customer Service Level Report Provides service level information for customers This report is used to provide service level information to service customers to help them determine optimum service levels needed based upon their own traffic data as well as provide documented evidence for increasing CIR It combines daily volume daily Health exceptions bandwidth distribution average Health Index ratings and availability for each DLCI onto a single page At a Glance Reports Provides consolidated DLCI and network performance information onto a single page At a Glance Report Consolidates bandwidth utilization network traffic events occurring over the reporting period and availability and latency levels information Variables other than bandwidth can
134. bbreviated list of the specified directory s contents If no directory is specified the current one is used put file7 file2 Copy file1 from a local directory on the host to file 2 in the current directory of the FrameSaver node If file2 is not specified the file will be named file on the FrameSaver node recv file file 2 Same as a get pwd Print the name of the current directory of the FrameSaver unit node bin Places the FTP session in binary transfer mode 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 5 41 Operation and Maintenance Upgrading System Software If you need to upgrade the FrameSaver unit s program code you must transfer the upgrade of the nam ocd file in the system memory directory using the put command NOTE Upgrades can be performed through the network using a Management PVC or through the COM port if Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 3 16 Communication Port Options B Procedure To download software 1 Initiate an FTP session to the device that you are upgrading 2 Type bin to enter binary transfer mode 3 Type hash to enter hash mode if you want to monitor the progress of the upgrade provided this function is supported by your equipment 4 Type cd system to change to the system directory 5 Perform a put of Rxxxxxx ocd xxxxxx being the software release number to the nam ocd file to start the upgrade If the message displayed is Then nam ocd File Transfer Complete The download was su
135. blank and the Message area displays valid selections press the spacebar the first valid setting for the field appears Continue pressing the spacebar to scroll through other possible settings May 2000 2 9 User Interface and Basic Operation 2 10 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration This chapter includes the following Basic Configuration Configuration Option Areas Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options Changing Configuration Options Saving Configuration Options m Using the Easy Install Feature m Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock m Setting Up Auto Configuration Selecting a Frame Relay Discovery Mode Automatically Removing a Circuit m Setting Up Back to Back Operation Changing Operating Mode Configuration Option Tables Configuring the Overall System Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System Configuring Service Level Verification Options Configuring General System Options Configuring the Physical Interfaces Configuring the Network Interface Configuring the User Data Port 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 1 Configuration Assigning Time Slots Cross Connections Assigning Frame Relay Time Slots to the Network Interface Assigning the Synchronous Data Port to Network Time Slots Clearing Assignments Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface Manually Configuring DLCI Records Configurin
136. catedesaeieckeasaneagadensnse vii m Product Related Documents a IX m Conventions Used AA AA X 1 About the FrameSaver FLEX 9123 System Overview AA eee ee eee Gama 1 1 FrameSaver FLEX Feature Sets 0 a 1 2 Basie BAE NAA AA 1 4 Advanced FLEX SLV Features aaa 1 7 CpenLare SLM EYE kaaa aa maba Saeed BAS AKA KAG A KA AG HAGDAN I GG KTA 1 8 NetScout Manager Plus and NetScout Probes 1 9 2 User Interface and Basic Operation 9123 A2 GB20 00 RIN AA PE 2 2 KE LA NAAAPI EA A 2 4 Screen Work APAPAP APA AA PAA 2 5 Navigating the Screens a AG BANA BALAG NAA KA BAGA kamang kaa 2 6 O CU GANA BA NAA NAA KAKA A GD NA AHIT 2 6 PING wa NA AK GARA KAAU KA KAU eed GAGANA ANG 2 7 Selecting from a Menu eee eens 2 8 Switching Between Screen Areas 000 cece ee ee eens 2 8 Scc a a 45 9e 4405 44025464944049409054059 055014400846 2 9 EST MOMONON oo tase nee PAA ARA ees 2 9 May 2000 Contents 3 Configuration E Base ONO aN aa Baha alee eles KAKO KALA sega 3 3 Configuration Option Areas eee eens 3 4 Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options 3 5 Changing Configuration Options a 3 6 Saving Configuration Options 06 0 06 cece eee e eee 3 7 m Using the Easy Install Feature 0 0 cee ees 3 8 m Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP 000 ee 3 10 m Entering System Inform
137. ccessful The file is loaded into system memory nam ocd File Transfer Failed The file is not valid for this FrameSaver unit Invalid file A different Rxxxxxx ocd file will need to be downloaded Repeat the step or end the FTP session NOTE During the download a series of hash marks appear When the hash marks stop appearing there is a pause of about 30 seconds before the nam ocd File Transfer Complete message appears Please be patient Do not exit from FTP at this time See Changing Software to activate the newly downloaded software 5 42 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Determining Whether a Download Is Completed To see whether a download has completed check the Identity screen Main Menu gt Status s Identity Check Alternate Software Rev under the NAM Identity column If a software revision number appears the file transfer is complete m fIn Progress appears the file is still being transferred m f Invalid appears no download has occurred or the download was not successful Changing Software Once a software upgrade is downloaded it needs to be activated When activated the unit resets then executes the downloaded software With this feature you control when the upgrade software is implemented B gt Procedure To switch to the new software 1 Goto the Control menu and select Select Software Release Main Menu Control Select Software Release The currently
138. ce Paradyne OpenLane NMS Documentation 7800 A2 GZ41 OpenLane 5 x Service Level Management for UNIX Quick Start Installation Instructions 7800 A2 GZ42 OpenLane 5 x Service Level Management for Windows NT Quick Start Installation Instructions NetScout Documentation 2930 170 NetScout Probe User Guide 2930 610 NetScout Manager Plus User Guide 2930 620 NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide 2930 788 NetScout Manager Plus Set Up amp Installation Guide Concord Communications Documentation 09 10010 005 Network Health User Guide 09 10020 005 Network Health Installation Guide 09 10050 002 Network Health Traffic Accountant Reports Guide 09 10070 001 Network Health Reports Guide Complete Paradyne documentation for this product is available at www paradyne com Select Library Technical Manuals To order a paper copy of this manual m Within the U S A call 1 800 PARADYNE 1 800 727 2396 m Outside the U S A call 1 727 530 8623 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 IX About This Guide Conventions Used Convention Used When Used Italic To indicate variable information e g DLCI nnnn Menu selection sequence To provide an abbreviated method for indicating the selections to be made from a menu or selections from within a menu before performing a procedural step For example Main Menu gt Status gt System and Test Status indicates that you should select Status from the Main Menu then se
139. configuration options for the FrameSaver unit to set up trap managers see Table 3 13 Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication gt SNMP NMS Security A table is displayed consisting of the network management systems identified by IP address that are allowed to access the FrameSaver unit by SNMP Table 3 13 SNMP NMS Security Options NMS IP Validation Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether security checks are performed on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to access the node Only allows access when the sending manager s IP address is listed on the SNMP NMS Security Options screen Enable Performs security checks Disable Does not perform security checks Number of Managers Possible Settings 1 10 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that are authorized to send SNMP messages to the FrameSaver unit An IP address must be configured for each management system allowed to send messages Configure IP addresses in the NMS n IP Address configuration option 1 10 Specifies the number of authorized SNMP managers NMS n IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Provides the IP address of an SNMP manager that is authorized to send SNMP messages to the unit If an SNMP message is received from an unauthorized NMS and its IP address cannot be
140. configured manually 3 12 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration NOTE If 1MPort the default is not the setting required for your application change the Frame Relay Discovery Mode before connecting the network cable or editing discovered option settings Otherwise the FrameSaver unit will start discovering DLC ls as soon as it powers up To recover from this problem and when some DLCls or PVC Connections have been configured manually edit a selected discovered DLCI or PVC connection manually If only a local management PVC between the router and the FrameSaver unit has been configured select the desired Frame Relay Discovery Mode and Save the change The default discovery mode is 1MPort management DLCls multiplexed with data DLCls on Port 1 In this mode for each DLCI discovered on the network the unit creates a multiplexed network interface DLCI which contains two EDLCls one for Port 1 data and the other for management a standard Port 1 DLCI with the same number as the network interface DLCI and a Management PVC then cross connects them When LMI is active on the network interface and PVC status information with provisioned DLCI numbers is next received from the network the unit automatically saves the settings to the Current Configuration area Configuration options set by selecting a discovery mode can be manually modified refined or deleted at any time using the Configuration menus No previousl
141. connection Unknown appears if communication with the far end device is not successful Average round trip latency measured in milliseconds between the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI connection Average round trip latency is measured every SLV sampling interval and the average is computed using packets with the configured SLV Packet Size bytes Table 3 2 Service Level Verification Options over the previous 15 minute period If SLV Packet Size is changed a new average is not available until a new sample has been received Unknown appears if communication with the far end device over the last 15 minutes has not been successful Same as average Avg RdTrip Latency but storing the maximum value of latency over the previous 15 minute interval Unknown appears if communication with the far end device over the last 15 minutes has not been successful Only appears for FrameSaver units when the SLV Delivery Ratio option is enabled 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 5 29 Operation and Maintenance The statistics collected by the unit depend upon the device at the far end of the connection If the far end device is a FrameSaver SLV unit frame relay latency and FDR DDR performance statistics are collected If the far end device is a non FrameSaver device or a FrameSaver 9120 or 9620 only frame relay statistics are collected DLCI Performance Statistics These statistics appear whe
142. ctions that follow provide pin assignments for each interface NOTE In the pin assignment tables of this appendix if the pin number is not shown it is not being used 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 C 1 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments T1 Network Interface The T1 network interface connector is an RJ48C 8 position keyed modular jack T1 Network Cable Feature No 3100 F1 500 Network access is via a 20 foot cable with an RJ48C unkeyed plug type connector on each end The following table shows pin assignments and the purpose of each Function Circuit Pin Number Receive Ring 1 From Network 1 Receive Tip T1 From Network 2 Transmit Ring R To Network 4 This cable comes with the FrameSaver unit Canadian T1 Line Interface Cable Feature No 3100 F1 510 The T1 line interface cable is used in Canada as an interface between the FrameSaver unit s network connector and the T1 network interface The following shows pin assignments and the purpose of each RJ48C Plug Unkeyed Receive Ring 1 Receive Ring Receive Tip 2 Receive Tip White Blue Transmit Ring Transmit Ring Transmit Ti Transmit Ti O White Orange White Orange j 98 16215 C 2 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments COM Port Connector The following table provides the pin assignments for the FrameSaver unit s 25 position EIA 232C communication port connector Direction Shield GND DCE Transmit Data TXD
143. ctive Port 1 An external DTE Loopback is running on the user data port DTE Init Ext LB Active Port 1 The DTE has initiated an external DTE Loopback on the user data port DTPLB Active Port 1 A Data Terminal Payload Loopback DTPLB i active for the specified slot and port Lamp Test Active The Lamp Test is active causing the LEDs on the faceplate to flash on and off LLB Active Network 1 A network Line Loopback LLB is active on the specified interface Monitor Pitn Active DLCI nnnn The unit is monitoring a test pattern on the frame relay link 1 2 specified DLCI on the specified frame relay link Monitor Pttn Active Interface A Monitor Pattern test is active on the specified interface This test cannot be activated on user data ports that have Port Use set to Frame Relay No Test Active No tests are currently running PLB Active Network 1 A Payload Loopback PLB is active on the specified interface PVC Loopback Active DLCI nnnn A PVC Loopback is active on the specified DLCI frame relay link 1 2 on the frame relay link RLB Active Network 1 A network Repeater Loopback RLB is active on the specified interface nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port May 2000 5 17 Operation and Maintenance Tab
144. d Test Status The following information is included on this screen m Self Test Results Messages m Last System Reset Date and Time m Health and Status Messages m Test Status Messages Self Test Results Messages One of these self test result messages appears in the Self Test Results field at the top of the System and Test Status screen Table 5 6 Self Test Results Messages Message What It Indicates What To Do Failure XXXXXXXX An internal failure occurred 1 Record the failure code XXXXXXXX represents an 8 digit hexadecimal failure 2 Reset the unit code used by service 3 Contact your service personnel representative Record the failure code before resetting the unit otherwise the error Information will be lost No problems were found No action needed during power on or reset Last System Reset Date and Time Passed This field indicates the last time the FrameSaver unit was reset It appears after the Self Test Results field at the top of the System and Test Status screen Date is in mm dd yyyy format month day year Time is in mm ss format minutes seconds May 2000 5 13 Operation and Maintenance Health and Status Messages The following table provides Health and Status messages that apply to the FrameSaver 9123 unit Table 5 7 Health and Status Messages 1 of 3 Message What It Indicates AIS at Network 1 An Alarm Indication Signal AIS is received by the network interface A
145. d to their normal condition Main Menu gt Test Lamp Test If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled and a Test Duration is set the Lamp Test stops when the test duration expires See Test Timeout Feature for additional information May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices This chapter includes OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System Setting Up FrameSaver FLEX and SLV Support OpenL ane Support of FrameSaver Devices 9123 A2 GB20 00 The OpenLane Service Level Management SLM system provides the following features Web and database services Web access to health and status information Web access to real time as well as historical graphs and reports Web access to SLV reports for units with the FLEX SLV feature set activated On demand polling of FrameSaver devices SNMP polling and reporting Web based diagnostic tests end to end PVC loopbacks connectivity and physical interface tests Basic device configuration including RMON alarm and threshold configuration when the unit has the advanced FLEX SLV feature set activated Automatic device and PVC discovery for SLV devices with their SLV Delivery Ratio configuration option enabled Easy firmware downloads to an entire network or parts of the network Remote FLEX SLV feature activation May 2000 7 1 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices m Device reset capability HP OpenVi
146. d transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for analysis or viewed via the menu driven user interface When viewed from the menu driven user interface the 12 most recent LMI messages are displayed m Service Provider Support Provides information and tools useful to network service providers which includes the following IP Routing Table Shows the IP routing table for the FrameSaver unit with network as well as host routes the number of hops to the destination the method by which the route was added to the table the interface used to get to the destination and how long the route has been in existence Troubleshooting PVC Provides a dedicated troubleshooting management link that helps service providers isolate problems within their network Back to Back Operation Allows two FrameSaver devices to be connected via a leased line network or for leased line simulation so that a point to point configuration can be implemented 1 6 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 About the FrameSaver FLEX 9123 Advanced FLEX SLV Features The following additional features are provided with the advanced FLEX SLV feature set TruePut Technology Using Frame Delivery Ratios FDR and Data Delivery Ratios DDR throughput within and above CIR as well as between CIR and EIR and above EIR can be measured precisely eliminating inaccuracies due to averaging Intelligent Service Level Verification Provides accurate throughput latency a
147. data the status is Active Packets in Buffer indicates the number of packets that have been captured Up to 8000 packets can be held When the buffer is full the oldest packets will be overwritten 4 To stop the utility press Enter The field toggles back to Start 5 Upload the data file holding the collected packets to a diskette so the information can be transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for debugging decoding See ransferring Collected Data in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance for additional information about this feature 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 6 5 Troubleshooting Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface The twelve most recent LMI events are stored in the trace log Once the capture buffer or trace log is full the oldest packets are overwritten To view the most recently captured packets using the menu driven user interface LMI Packet Capture Utility s Display LMI Trace Log LMI Trace Log Example main control 1mi capture display log 9123 C SLV Device Name Node A 3 26 2000 23 32 LMI TRACE LOG Page 1 of 3 Packets Transmitted to Net1 FR Packets Received from Net1 FR1 LMI Record 1 at Os Status Enquiry Message 13 bytes LMI Type is Standard on DLCI 1023 Sequence Number Exchange Send Seq 181 Rcv Seq 177 LMI Record 2 at 0 s Status Enquiry Message 13 bytes LMI Type is Standard on DLCI 1023 Sequence Number Exchange Send Seq 181 Rcv Seq 177 Ctrl a to access th
148. dent with Net1 FR1 Default Setting Independent Configures the device to allow the state of the LMI to be passed from one interface to another determining how the unit will handle a change in the LMI state Sometimes referred to as LMI pass through Independent Handles the LMI state of each interface separately so that the LMI state of one interface has no effect on the LMI state of another interface Provides LMI Spoofing This is the recommended setting when backup is configured and for Network Service Providers NSPs Net1 FR1_Follows_Port 1 Brings LMI down on the network interface when LMI on Port 1 goes down disabling the network interface and deasserting its control leads When LMI on Port 1 comes back up the network interface is reenabled The LMI state on the network interface has no effect on the LMI state on Port 1 That is the network interface s LMI follows Port 1 s LMI Used at central sites this setting is useful when the remote site router on the other end of the PVC connection can initiate recovery via a redundant central site when there is a catastrophic central site LAN or router failure Not recommended for NSPs Port 1 Follows Net1 FR1 Brings LMI down on Port 1 when LMI on the network interface goes down disabling Port 1 and deasserting its control leads When LMI on the network interface comes back up Port 1 is reenabled and its control leads are reasserted The LMI state on Port 1 has no effect on the
149. e AT Default Setting Disable Specifies the type of commands to be sent over the COM port Disable Commands will not be sent over the COM port AT Standard Attention AT Commands are sent over the COM port to control the external device All AT command strings will end with a carriage return hex 0x0D and a line feed hex Ox0A CAUTION Do not use this setting if you have an asynchronous terminal connected to the COM port Dial In Access Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Controls whether external devices can dial in to the FrameSaver unit through the COM port based on the Port Use option setting Display Conditions This option does not appear if External Modem Commands is disabled Enable Answers incoming calls and establishes connection to the remote terminal or IP network Disable Does not answer incoming calls 3 62 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Security and Logins This chapter includes the following 9123 A2 GB20 00 Limiting Access Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access Controlling External COM Port Device Access Controlling Telnet or FTP Access Limiting Telnet Access Limiting FTP Access Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link Controlling SNMP Access Disabling SNMP Access Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses Creating a Login Modifying a Login Deleting
150. e threshold value which may take up to 15 minutes nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port May 2000 6 7 Troubleshooting Table 6 1 Alarm Conditions 2 of 4 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do Check the LAN connected to the Ethernet port Ethernet Link Down The communication link for the Ethernet port is down and the Interface Status for the port is enabled Link Down The specified frame relay Administratively link has been disabled by frame relay link the unit due to LMI Behavior conditions or LMI Protocol on another link is in a failed state This is not an alarm condition so System Operational appears as well LMI Down The Local Management frame relay link Interface is down for the specified frame relay link 2 frame relay link is one of the following Verify that the network LMI is up If it is contact your network provider For the network interface If LMI was never up verify that the LMI Protocol setting reflects the LMI type being used If LMI was never up Verify that the proper time slots have been configured Verify that the LMI Protocol setting reflects the LMI type being used Verify that Frame Relay Performance Statistics show LMI frames being tra
151. e circuit CA ITU 105 RTS is monitored to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE Disable RTS is not monitored RTS is assumed to be asserted and data is being transmitted regardless of the state of the lead Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks Possible Settings Local Disable Default Setting Disable Allows a local external DTE Loopback to be started or stopped via the ports attached data terminal equipment using the port s interchange lead LL ITU 141 Local The DTE attached to the port controls the local external DTE Loopback Disable The DTE attached to the port cannot control the local external DTE Loopback 3 28 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Assigning Time Slots Cross Connections The Time Slot Assignment Cross Connect feature provides an easy method of assigning time slots for frame relay data and creating cross connections to the synchronous data interface The system allows you to assign DSOs on the T1 network interface and between the user data port and network interface in order to share the T1 network Based upon the setting of Service Type on the Easy Install screen the following cross connection assignments can be made m Service Type set to Frame Relay Frame relay links to the network interface time slots m Service Type set to Leased Line Synchronous data port to the network interface time slots You can also clear cross connection assignments for the unit
152. e circuitry of the remote device Main Menu gt Test Network Physical Tests Other dq ee ER e Interface 1S Interface jp CAUTION This test may affect the operation of the frame relay PVCs assigned to the selected port While in loopback the frame relay link will be down so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted 97 15337 A PLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active m Line Loopback Repeater Loopback Send Remote Line Loopback or an active Monitor Pattern on this network interface Send Pattern test on this network interface 6 22 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting Repeater Loopback The local Repeater Loopback RLB loops data received from the user data port after the signal has passed through the framing circuitry Use the RLB to ensure that all of the data is correct up to the point where it is sent over the interface This helps to indicate that the FrameSaver unit is operational Main Menu gt Test Network Physical Tests An attached device or test equipment should generate and monitor data to be looped back Other T1 AIS nea Interface yy nterace _ gt 97 15338 The FrameSaver unit will not respond to any messages from the network during this test CAUTION This test may affect the operation of the frame relay PVCs assigned to the selected port While in loopback the frame relay link will be down so any IP data bein
153. e network switch When this feature is enabled the unit can enforce CIR and EIR Excess Information Rate marking frames that exceed CIR as DE Discard Eligible using the same method used by the switch RMON User History Performance Statistics via SNMP Polling Provides access to ESF line physical interface and basic frame relay performance Statistics by polling the FrameSaver unit using SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol These statistics are available real time via the Enterprise MIB and historically as an RMON2 User History object Trap Event Log Shows the SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol trap event log for the FrameSaver unit with the most recent events first keeping a running total for all trap events stored the amount of time since the event was logged plus a description of the trap Extensive Testing Capability Provides a variety of tests to identify and diagnose device and network problems including nondisruptive PVC loopbacks and end to end connectivity Tests can be commanded from the unit s menu driven user interface or the OpenLane system These tests include V 54 or FT1 ANSI data channel loopback support so the frame relay network service provider can perform a physical loopback from its own switch without having to contact the local service provider for loopback activation LMI Packet Capture Provides a way of uploading data that has been captured in a trace file so the data can be uploaded an
154. e used interchangeably These keys use the following conventions For the screen Select function And press Enter to Return to the Main Menu screen Morm Eore Exit Terminate the menu driven user interface session Enter new data Ooro Modify Modify existing data Sors Save Save information Rorr Update screen with current information Corc ClrStats Clear network performance statistics and refresh the screen Variations include m CIrSLV8DLCIStats for clearing SLV and DLCI statistics m ClrLinkStats for clearing frame relay link statistics Uoru PgUp Display the previous page Dord Display the next page Norn Lorl ME i May 2000 2 7 User Interface and Basic Operation Selecting from a Menu B gt Procedure To select from a menu 1 Tab or press the down arrow key to position the cursor on a menu selection or press the up arrow key to move the cursor to the bottom of the menu list Each menu selection is highlighted as you press the key to move the cursor from position to position 2 Press Enter The selected menu or screen appears B Procedure To return to a previous screen press the Escape Esc key until you reach the desired screen Switching Between Screen Areas Use Ctrl a to switch between screen areas see the example on page 2 5 B Procedure To switch to the function keys area 1 Press Ctrl a to switch from the screen area to the function keys area 2
155. eRly1 N17 N118 N19 N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Slot 1 T1 FR NAM Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh 5 22 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance The following information is available for network interface time slots NO1 N24 The Cross Connect Status Field bottom Indicates Unassgn The time slot is unassigned FrameRly1 The time slot is assigned to the network frame relay link This assignment only appears when the FrameSaver unit is operating in frame relay mode S1 P01 The synchronous data port Port 1 is assigned to the network interface time slot 01 to 24 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 5 23 Operation and Maintenance IP Routing Table Use the IP Routing Table to see all the routes configured in the FrameSaver unit 5 24 Main Menu Status gt IP Routing Table IP Routing Table Screen Example main status ip rout Device Name Node A Destination IP ROUTING TABLE Gateway 9123 C SLV 3 26 2000 23 32 Page 1 of 2 Interface 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 Refresh 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 002 220 221 000 111 000 000 220 222 222 002 002 000 111 113 111 111 PgDn 026 026 042 042 042 026 026 026 026 001 001 001 001 001 001 001
156. eate a login record 1 Select Administer Logins Main Menu Control Administer Logins 2 Select New and set the following configuration options as appropriate In the field Enter the Login ID ID of 1 to 10 characters Password Password from 1 to 10 characters Re enter password Password again to verify that you entered the correct password into the device Access Level Access level 1 2 or 3 m Level 1 User can add change and display configuration options save and perform device testing m Level 2 User can monitor and perform diagnostics display status and configuration option information m Level 3 User can only monitor and display status and configuration screens CAUTION Make sure at least one login is set up for Level 1 access or you may be inadvertently locked out NOTE see Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication in Chapter 6 Troubleshooting should you be locked out inadvertently 3 Save your changes When Save is complete the cursor is repositioned at the Login ID field ready for another entry Security is enabled by the configuration options Login Required for the communication port modem port and Telnet Login Required or FTP Login Required for a Telnet or FTP Session 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 4 11 Security and Logins See Configuring SNMP NMS Security Options in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about security configuration options
157. ed on DLCI 100 of Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay m devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 B 13 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Traps RMON Specific B 14 Two traps are defined to support the Alarm and Events Groups of RMON See RMON Alarm and Event Defaults for the default values that will generate RMON specific traps Table B 8 RMON Specific Traps and Variable Bindings risingAlarm fallingAlarm Variable Bindings Possible Cause alarmindex RFC 1757 alarmVariable Object being monitored has risen above the set threshold RFC 1757 String alarmSampleType Change in variableName RFC 1757 typeString threshold of SalarmRising Threshold by S alarmValue AlarmRising Threshold e g Octets received on Network T1 frame relay rose to threshold of 1 alarmValue RFC 1757 alarmRising Threshold or alarm Falling Threshold RFC 1757 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib alarmindex RFC 1757 Object being monitored has fallen below the set threshold alarmVariable RFC 1757 String Change in variableName alarmSample Type typeString threshold of RFC 1757 SalarmFallingThreshold by alarmValue RFC 1757 alarmValue AlarmFalling Threshold alarmFalling Threshold e g Octets received on RFC 1757 Network T1 frame relay fell devLastTrapString to thres
158. em to create a PVC Main Menu Auto Configuration Frame Relay Discovery Mode Automatically configured network DLCls are multiplexed and each automatically configured port DLCI carries the same DLCI Number as its corresponding network DLCI These are the same DLCI numbers that would have been available had the FrameSaver unit not been inserted in the link between your equipment and the network NOTE A local Management PVC e g the PVC between the router and the FrameSaver unit s user data port must be configured manually it cannot be configured automatically The following will occur when a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is selected Discovery Mode Configuration Description 1MPort Auto configuration is enabled on Port 1 default A management DLCI is configured A multiplexed network DLCI containing two embedded DLCls EDLCls is configured for Port 1 user data and management data A PVC connection is configured between the network and port DLCls Auto configuration is enabled on Port 1 No management DLCI is configured A multiplexed network DLCI is configured for Port 1 user data A PVC connection is configured between the network and port DLCls NetOnly Auto configuration of a network DLCI only no Port 1 or PVC connections are configured No Port 1 PVC connection or management DLCI is configured Disable No frame relay discovery or automatic configuration takes place The FrameSaver unit will be
159. enabled String ifString up 3 Ifthe LMI Protocol is not configured a linkUp linkDown trap is based solely upon whether the interface is enabled or disabled May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Traps enterprise Specific 9123 A2 GB20 00 These traps indicate that an enterprise specific event has occurred Supported enterprise specific traps are listed below Table B 7 enterprise Specific Traps and Variable Bindings 1 of 3 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause devFrExtDicilflndex devFrExt mib m devFrExtDiciDici devFrExt mib m devFrExtDIciCIR devFrExt mib devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib enterpriseCIR Change 15 CIR has changed due to the LMI report LMI Protocol is set to Standard and the network s CIR changed String CIR on ifString changed to CIR bps enterpriseConfig Change 6 devLastTrapString Configuration has been changed devHealthAndStatus via the menu driven user mib interface an SNMP Manager or auto configuration after 60 seconds has elapsed without another change String Device configuration change devFrExtDicilflndex devFrExt mib m devFrExtDiciDici devFrExt mib devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus enterpriseDLCI mib DLCI Status is set to Inactive the Down 11 DLCI is down Strings SifString down Due to LMI
160. enabled when downloading files Enable Allows an FTP session between the system and an FTP client Disable Does not allow FTP sessions FTP Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether a login ID and password are required for an FTP session If required the login used is the same login used for a menu driven user interface session This option does not affect the TS Access Management Link Enable User is prompted for a login ID and password Disable No login is required for an FTP session FTP Max Transfer Rate Kbps Possible Settings 1 1536 Default Setting 1536 Sets the maximum receive rate of file transfer to the system via management PVCs This option allows new software and configuration files to be downloaded using selected bandwidth without interfering with normal operation Using this option new software and configuration files can be downloaded quickly using the default settings or at a slower rate over an extended period of time by selecting a slower speed Based upon TCP flow control the FTP server in the system throttles bandwidth to match this setting 1 1536 Sets the download line speed from 1 kilobits per second to the maximum management speed 3 52 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Configuring SNMP NMS Security Select SNMP NMS Security from the Management and Communication menu to display add or change SNMP security
161. entered for Network Health to find the FLEX units on the network and discover their elements These elements are resources that can be polled e g LAN WAN interfaces frame relay circuits routers and servers The two types of elements that can be polled are m Statistics elements Provide counters and other gauges for information gathered about your network for statistical and trend analysis Conversation elements Provide RMON and similar data for information gathered about network traffic between nodes B Procedure To find FLEX device elements in your network 1 Select the LAN WAN radio button to specify the element type to be found Network Health treats frame relay element discovery as a WAN element type 2 Enter the IP Addresses of the FLEX units to be located and the Community String Community Name in the FrameSaver unit The Community String is case sensitive 3 Select the Discover button The Discover dialog box closes and the Discovering dialog box opens showing the results of the discovery process A message indicates the number of elements discovered and the number of existing elements updated when the discovery process is complete Depending upon the number of units entered and the size of your network it could take anywhere from a few minutes to an hour or longer to discover all elements in the network See Discovering Elements in the Network Health User Guide for additional information and to learn
162. er end can send and monitor pattern tests The example below shows a PVC Test screen for a FrameSaver unit with the multiplexed DLCI 550 selected If a standard DLCI was selected Disruptive rather than Non Disruptive would be displayed after Test Also the Connectivity test would not appear PVC Tests Screen Example main test network_pvc 9123 C SLV Device Name Node A 3 26 2000 23 32 NETWORK PVC TESTS DLCI Number 550 Test Non Disruptive Command Status Result PVC Loopback Start Inactive 0 00 00 Send Pattern Start Inactive 0 00 00 Monitor Pattern Start Inactive 0 00 00 Sequence Errors 99999 Data Errors 99999 Connectivity Inactive RndTrip Time ms 99999 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit NOTE Errors encountered during these tests may be caused by mismatched CIRs in the two FrameSaver units If errors are detected verify the CIR configuration and retest May 2000 6 17 Troubleshooting PVC Loopback Send Pattern 6 18 The PVC Loopback loops frames back to the selected interface on a per PVC basis This test logically not physically loops back frames received from another FrameSaver device through the selected frame relay PVC to the same device Main Menu Test Network PVC Tests Network PVC Loopback PVC x Network PVC x 98 16186 Main Menu Test Data Port PVC Tests Port PVC Loopback DTE PVC x PVC x Network Cc CP ee
163. erformance Statistics DLCI m Use the ClrLinkStats function key to reset the frame relay link performance statistics Performance Statistics Frame Relay m Use the ClrNearStats or ClrFarStats function key to reset all near end or all far end Extended SuperFrame ESF line performance statistics Performance Statistics gt ESF Line 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 5 27 Operation and Maintenance Service Level Verification Performance Statistics 5 28 These statistics appear when Service Level Verification SLV is selected from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics Service Level Verification They only appear for the network interface and only if DLCls are multiplexed In addition this screen only appears for units with the FLEX SLV feature set when Service Type is set to Frame Relay Table 5 12 Service Level Verification Performance Statistics 1 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates Far End Circuit Number of the multiplexed DLCI or VPI VCI Virtual Path Identifier Virtual Channel Identifier at the other end of the connection If the far end circuit is a DLCI the DLC number 16 1007 appears If a VPI VCI the number is displayed as xx yyy xx being the VPI number O 15 and yyy being the VCI number 32 2047 None appears if the unit has not communicated with the other end Far End IP Addr IP Address of the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI connection
164. es including RMON specific traps and the default settings that will generate RMON specific SNMP traps Table 3 14 SNMP Traps Options 1 of 3 SNMP Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the FrameSaver unit sends trap messages to the currently configured SNMP trap manager s Enable Sends trap messages Disable Does not send trap messages Number of Trap Managers Possible Settings 1 6 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that will receive SNMP trap messages from the FrameSaver unit An NMS IP Address must be configured in the NMS n IP Address configuration option for each trap manager to receive trap messages 1 6 Specifies the number of trap managers inclusive NMS n IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address that identifies the SNMP manager s to receive SNMP traps Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Adds to or changes the IP address for the trap manager Clear Fills the NMS IP address with zeros 3 54 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 14 SNMP Traps Options 2 of 3 Initial Route Destination Possible Settings AutoRoute Ethernet COM PVCname Default Settin
165. es PO 050 bytes DLCI Up Time 28 B 1000 bytes E lt 4000 bytes Link Up Time 55 10r BF EFE Tire or ore T Aua Hango Custom Cemed TOPE 1958 04 kor Ph From 10371968 00 10 FM To 102711998 05 39 PM m Trend Reports Perform trend analysis on up to ten specified variables for DLCls Variables other than bandwidth can be selected for a trend report e g burst octets but a bandwidth trend report should be generated when investigating problems that appear on Exceptions Reports Supplemental Reports and Health reports Use trend reports to view individual variables for DLCIs having a high Health Index rating to help locate which variable is causing a problem leading to a DLCI s poor Health Index rating See the Network Health Reports Guide for more information about these reports 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 9 9 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices 9 10 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Menu Hierarchy Menus The following menus are a graphical representation of the FrameSaver FLEX 9123 unit s menu organization The following menu structures are shown m Frame Relay mode see page A 2 m eased Line mode see page A 4 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 Menu Hierarchy Menu Hierarchy Frame Relay Mode System and Test Status Self Test Results e Last System Reset Health and Status e Test Status PVC Tests DLC Number e PVC Loopback Send Pattern e Monitor Pattern
166. ese functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh PgUp PgDn Select Refresh to update the screen with the twelve most recently collected LMI messages The following information is provided m The internal LMI record number assigned to the packet 1 8000 and the amount of time the utility was running when the packet was captured The maximum amount of time displayed is 4 294 967 seconds s which is reset to 1 second when this amount of time is exceeded m The type of message either Status or Status Enquiry from the captured packet and the number of bytes in the packet The LMI Type identified in the Protocol Discriminator portion of the captured packet and the DLCI number for the packet The type of information contained in the captured packet either Sequence Number Exchange or Full Status Report m The send and receive rcv sequence numbers from the captured packet 0 255 m On the Packets Received side of the screen PVC status for up to ten DLCls can be shown It shows the DLCI number its active bit status and if Standard LMI is running the DLCl s CIR value 6 6 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Alarms 9123 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting The following table describes the alarm conditions that will generate an SNMP trap for a physical interface and the frame relay LMIs and DLCls These alarm conditions also generate Health and Status messages seen on the System and Test Status screen Main Menu g
167. ess for the port which can be viewed or edited Clear Fills the IP address with zeros Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask associated with the IP address that is needed to access the Ethernet port 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Set the Ethernet port s subnet mask The range for each byte is 000 to 255 Clear Fills the subnet mask associated with the IP address with zeros Default Gateway Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address for the port s default gateway It is used for packets that do not have a route 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the port which can be viewed or edited i e a router on the LAN Clear Fills the default gateway s IP address with zeros May 2000 3 57 Configuration Table 3 15 Ethernet Port Options 2 of 2 Proxy ARP Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the port can be used to supply the MAC Media Access Control address of a FrameSaver unit at the other end of a PVC using ARP Address Resolution Protocol This technique is used for communication between devices on different networks but on the same subnet Using this technique the Default Gateway Address is provided when
168. ess is denied Contact your system administrator to verify your password Invalid Test A conflicting loopback or Wait until other test ends and Combination pattern test was in progress message clears when Start was selected to start another test or was active on the same or Cancel all tests from the Test screen Path main test another interface when Stop the test from the same Start was selected screen the test was started from Limit of six Login IDs An attempt to enter a new Delete another login password reached login ID was made and the combination limit of six login password combinations has been reached Reenter the new login ID May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 9123 A2 GB20 00 Table 5 5 Device Messages 3 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do Limit of Mgmt PVCs reached Limit of PVC Connections reached Name Must be Unique No Destination Link DLCls Available No DLCls available for connection No DLCls available for connection No DLCls Available for Mgmt PVC No DLCls Defined No more DLCls allowed New was selected from the PVC Connection Table and the maximum number of management PVCs has already been created New was selected from the PVC Connection Table and the maximum number of PVCs has already been created Name entered for a management PVC has been used previously New was selected from the PVC Connection Table but even though DLCls are available to form a con
169. estination have been configured The route remains until the unit s configuration changes NMS The route was added by a Network Management System using SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol The route remains until there is a power reset of the unit ICMP The route was added because an ICMP Internet Control Management Protocol redirect message was received from a router indicating a better route to the destination That is a datagram was sent to a router and the router is informing the datagram source through an ICMP redirect message of a better route Tmp The route was added as a temporary route in order to respond to an IP packet that was received The route remains until its TTL expires or there is a power reset Interface Specifies the interface to be used to reach the destination m COM Communications port Ethernet Ethernet port PVCname Name of the management PVC e g PVCMgmt1001 Internal The interface to be used for software loopbacks or internal device functions in order to reach the destination TTL The Time to Live that was set for the route in seconds 1 999 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 5 25 Operation and Maintenance Performance Statistics Use the Performance Statistics menu to display statistical information for a selected interface Statistical information is useful when trying to determine the severity and frequency or duration of a condition Main Menu Status Performance
170. et up e g 980 3 42 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 9 Node IP Options 1 of 3 Node IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address needed to access the node Since an IP address is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via a management PVC 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the node which can be viewed or edited Clear Fills the node IP address with zeros Node Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask associated with the IP address that is needed to access the node Since the subnet mask is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via a management PVC 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the node which can be viewed or edited Clear Fills the node subnet mask with zeros When the node s subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 Default IP Destination Possible Settings None COM Ethernet PVCname Default Setting None Specifies an IP destination to route data that does not have a specifically defined route Examples m If the default
171. etting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies a unique IP address for accessing the unit via the COM port Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the COM port which you can View or edit Clear Clears the IP address for the COM port and fills the address with zeros When the IP Address is all zeros the COM port uses the Node IP Address if one has been configured Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the COM port which you Can view or edit Clear Clears the subnet mask for the COM port and fills the address with zeros When the node subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 RIP Possible Settings None Standard_out Default Setting None Specifies which Routing Informatio
172. ew adapters for integrating OpenLane with the OpenView Web interface The advanced FLEX SLV feature set may be activated depending upon the model ordered or it can be activated when SLV functionality is needed using the OpenLane SLM system To activate FLEX SLV functionality at a later time order an Activation Certificate Feature No 9123 C1 220 Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System Instructions for installing the OpenLane SLM system are found in the following documents OpenLane 5 x Service Level Management for UNIX Quick Start Installation Instructions OpenLane 5 x Service Level Management for Windows NT Quick Start Installation Instructions See Product Related Documents in About This Guide for document numbers Select the appropriate document In addition to installation instructions these documents include instructions for m Starting and stopping the OpenLane Web and database services m Accessing the OpenLane application m Adding a FrameSaver device Adding a Customer ID The OpenLane SLM system has an extensive Help system For additional information refer to the following sources For UNIX users Refer to the readme txt file for distributed infrastructure details and the online Help for operational details For Windows NT users Refer to the online Help 72 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices Setting Up FrameSaver FLEX and SLV Support With the OpenLane SLM system s
173. exed DLCI and link If the frame relay link is Net1 FR1 the timeout is on the network FrameRly1 timeslot assignment When a hardware bypass capable device has been detected at the other end of the PVC and this condition occurs only user data for EDLCI 0 will be transmitted as long as the condition exists Two Level 1 Users Another user with Level 1 Wait until no other Level 1 Accessing Device security access is currently users are accessing the unit if accessing the unit testing or configuration will be i f ke Be aware that actions of performed the other user may override your test commands and configuration changes Yellow at Network 1 A yellow alarm signal is received on the network interface m Network cable problem Check that your network cable is securely attached at both ends a 11 facility problem Contact your network provider nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port 6 10 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting Viewing the Trap Event Log The Trap Event Log displays all traps stored in the SNMP trap event log ASCII trap strings used to describe trap events are provided in the tables contained in Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps in Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults See
174. fic trap messages These traps are not supported on the COM port Link Trapsinterfaces a an Network Generates these trap messages on the network interface only Tis For applicable T1 FrameSaver units generates these trap messages for linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific events on both the T1 network and DSX 1 interfaces Ports Generates these trap messages for linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific events on the user data port only All Generates these trap messages for linkUp and enterpriseSpecific events on all interfaces except for the COM port that are applicable to the FrameSaver model DLCI Traps on Interfaces Possible Settings Network Ports All None Default Setting All Specifies which interfaces will generate linkUp and linkDown trap messages for individual DLCls These traps are only supported on the frame relay interfaces Network Generates these trap messages on DLCls for the network interface only Ports Generates these trap messages for DLCls on a user data port only All Generates these trap messages on all frame relay interfaces None No DLCI trap messages are generated RMON Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether remote monitoring traps are sent to the currently configured trap manager s RMON traps are typically sent as a result of the Alarms and Events Groups of RMON1 when a selected variable s configured threshold
175. formation rate Above EIR The number of frames and octets sent by the far end device on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were above the excess information rate m With DE Set The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with the discard eligible bit set Only appears for the network interface Only appears for units with the FLEX SLV feature set Frame Relay Delivery Ratio delivered frames offered frames Data Delivery Ratio delivered octets offered octets 5 30 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 9123 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 13 DLCI Performance Statistics 2 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates Total Rx Frames Rx Octets m Within CIR m Between CIR8EIR Above EIR m With BECN Set With DE Set With FECN Set m With BECN Set The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with backward explicit congestion notifications BECNs are sent to notify users of data traffic congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator Total number of data frames and octets 8 bit bytes received for the selected DLCI on the frame relay link The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were within the committed information rate The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link th
176. g AutoRoute Specifies the initial route used to reach the specified Trap Manager When proprietary RIP is active only one unit in the network needs to specify an interface or management link as the initial destination All other units can use the default setting Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option AutoRoute Uses proprietary RIP from other FrameSaver devices to learn the route for sending traps to the specified Trap Manager or the Default IP Destination when no route is available in the routing table see Table 3 9 Node IP Options Ethernet Uses the Ethernet port Only appears when the Ethernet port s Interface Status option is enabled see Table 3 15 Ethernet Port Options COM Uses the COM port Only available when Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 3 16 Communication Port Options PVCname Uses the defined management linkname the name given the Management PVC Only appears when at least one Management PVC is defined for the node General Traps Possible Settings Disable Warm AuthFail Both Default Setting Both Determines whether SNMP trap messages for warmStart and or authenticationFailure events are sent to the currently configured trap manager s Disable Does not send trap messages for these events Warm Sends trap messages for warmStart events only AuthFail Sends trap messages for authenticati
177. g PVC Connections Setting Up Management and Communication Options Configuring Node IP Information Configuring Management PVCs Configuring General SNMP Management Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support Configuring SNMP NMS Security Configuring SNMP Traps Configuring the Ethernet Port Configuring the Communication Port Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Basic Configuration Configuration option settings determine how the FrameSaver unit operates Use the FrameSaver unit s Configuration Edit Display menu to display or change configuration option settings The Configuration Edit Display menu of the FrameSaver 9123 is shown below Configuration Menu main config 9123 C SLV Device Name Node A 5 26 1999 23 32 CONFIGURATION EDIT DISPLAY System Network Data Ports Time Slot Assignment PVC Connections Management and Communication Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save Changing an Auto Configuration setting can also change the FrameSaver unit s configuration See Setting Up Auto Configuration for additional information 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 3 Configuration Configuration Option Areas The FrameSaver unit arrives with configured factory default settings which are located in the Factory Default Configuration option area You can find the default settings for config
178. g features 1 4 Easy Installation Provides a simplified menu that allows the unit to be installed like a standard leased line SNMP DSU CSU and allows selection of either leased line or frame relay service A straight forward installation menu Is available that requires minimal configuration to get the unit up and running and to set up remote configuration and management via Telnet access from the NOC Network Operations Center Test equipment can then be connected to the data port and a BERT Bit Error Rate Test run to verify operation Frame Relay Aware Management Supports diagnostic and network management features over the frame relay network using the Annex A Annex D and Standard LMI management protocol The unit s frame relay capability also supports Inband management channels over the frame relay network using dedicated PVCs Unique nondisruptive diagnostics CIR monitoring on a PVC basis Multiple PVCs on an interface Multiplexing management PVCs with user data PVCs Multiplexing multiple PVCs going to the same location onto a single network PVC Router Independence Unique diagnostics performance monitoring PVC based in band network management and SNMP connectivity is not dependent upon external routers cables or LAN adapters Inverse ARP and Standard RIP Support Provides Inverse ARP Address Resolution Protocol support so the frame relay router at one end of a management PVC can
179. g sent while this test is active will be disrupted An RLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active Payload Loopback Send Remote Line Loopback or an active Monitor Pattern on this network interface 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 6 23 Troubleshooting Send Line Loopback 6 24 The remote Line Loopback LLB up and down codes are in band codes that allow control of a remote device The LLB Up code invokes a line loopback in the remote unit while the LLB Down code terminates the remote line loopback Network loopbacks are defined in AT amp T TR 62411 Main Menu gt Test Network Physical Tests A remote LLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active m Any Loopback on the same interface m Send FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on the synchronous data port Data Channel Loopback on the frame relay link on this network interface B gt Procedure To start and stop a remote Line Loopback 1 Select Network Physical Tests Main Menu gt Test Network Physical Tests 2 Select the code Up or Down in the Send Line Loopback field Up Puts a remote device in loopback Down Takes the remote device out of loopback 3 Highlight Send and press Enter to start the test The code is sent for 10 seconds 4 View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting Data Channel Loopbacks on a Frame Relay Lin
180. ged 5 Select the Install button down the center of the Configuration Manager main window to load alarms for the unit This may take some time so please be patient See Editing Alarms if any default settings need to be changed 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 8 5 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Editing Alarms B gt Procedure 1 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window 2 Select the Custom radio button from the Properties File area in the upper right of the window then Property down the center of the screen The Custom Property Editor window opens Property Editor Custom C Domain RT Delay Proxy SNMP Properties File Grenadabs Type FrameRelay Logging Domain Stat Host Cony ART DLC Trap Variable Rising Falling ILCI USRIEF FrSent elta 46000 45000 3 Select a DLCI from the Trap list and select the Edit button to the right of the list The Edit Trap window opens 8 6 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 9123 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Edit Trap Domain USRIEF HA DLCI 300 HA Stats Type Ethernet Stats H Trap Yariable Drop Events RA Key1 oO wey PO Type JAbsolute Delta Rising _ Falling _ Both Threshold 45000 5000 Severity i i Script i
181. gress Time slot discovery is currently taking place to Network 1 determine the time slots that will be used for frame relay traffic on the network interface This message only appears when the Time Slot Discovery option is enabled Main Menu gt Configuration Time Slot Assignment Frame Relay Network Assignments and an LMI failure is detected on the network interface s frame relay link Yellow at Network 1 A yellow alarm signal is received on the network interface Possible reasons include Network cable problem m 11 facility problem nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port Does not apply to a TS Management Link DLCI 5 16 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 9123 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Test Status Messages These test messages appear in the right column of the System and Test Status screen You have the option of allowing the test to continue or aborting the test See Chapter 6 Troubleshooting for more information on tests including how to start and stop them Table 5 8 Test Status Messages 1 of 2 Message What It Indicates DCLB Active Net1 FR1 Port 1 A Data Channel V 54 Loopback DCLB is active on the T1 network frame relay link or on the data for the user data port DTE External LB A
182. hapter 3 Configuration for more information about setting FTP configuration options 4 6 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Security and Logins Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link B Procedure To limit Telnet or FTP access when the session is on the TS Management Link 1 Select the Telnet and FTP Session options Main Menu 5 Configuration s Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Disable Telnet Session and or FTP Session as appropriate 3 Return to the Management and Communication menu and select Node IP 4 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable access via the TS Access TS Access Management Link to None Management Link Assign an access level to the TS TS Management Access Level to Level 2 Access Management Link or Level 3 NOTE Regardless of a user s login access level a user cannot operate at a level higher than the access level specified for the session e g if a user has a Level 1 login and Level 2 telnet access has been set the Level 1 user can only operate as a Level 2 user If you are going to allow users to configure the unit keep the access at Level 1 5 Save your changes See Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support or Configuring Node IP Information in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about these configuration options 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 4 7 Security and Logins
183. he MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP get and set commands Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support Telnet and FTP options control whether a Telnet or FTP File Transport Protocol session is allowed through an interconnected IP network and the access security applicable to the session Two Telnet sessions can be active at a time see Table 3 12 Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Session When a TS Access Management Link has been set up and activated the following options have no effect upon the PVC m Telnet Login Required m Session Access Level FTP Login Required Table 3 12 Telnet and FTP Session Options 1 of 3 Telnet Session Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether the FrameSaver unit will respond to a session request from a Telnet client on an interconnected IP network Enable Allows Telnet sessions between the FrameSaver unit and Telnet client Disable Does not allow Telnet sessions Telnet Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether a user ID and password referred to as the login are required to access the menu driven user interface via a Telnet session If required the login used is the same login used for an menu driven user interface session This option does not affect the TS Access Management Link Enable Requires
184. he Test Duration min configuration option see Configuring General System Options in Chapter 3 Configuration NOTE These configuration options do not pertain to tests commanded by the DTE like a DTE initiated External Loopback Starting and Stopping a Test 9123 A2 GB20 00 Use this procedure to start monitor or abort specific tests To abort all active tests on all interfaces see Aborting All Tests When the status of a testis The only command available is Inactive Start Start or stop an individual test using the same procedure NOTE If the Service Type setting on the Easy Install screen changes all currently active tests are stopped May 2000 6 15 Troubleshooting B Procedure Aborting All Tests To start and stop a loopback or a set pattern test 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Test 2 Select an interface and test e g Network or Data Port PVC Tests and press Enter The selected test screen appears Start appears in the Command column Inactive appears in the Status column 3 Select the Port number and press Enter 4 Select the DLCI number and press Enter if a PVC test has been selected The cursor is positioned at Start in the Command column of the first available test Start is highlighted 5 Highlight the Start command for the test you want to start and press Enter Stop now appears and is highlighted and the status of the test changes to Active 6 Press Enter t
185. highlighted that is in the On state They are described in Table 5 4 Table 5 4 Additional Control Leads Label Indication What It Means Network Interface LMI Operational Status LMI is operating successfully on the first frame relay link on the network interface This control lead is filtered in Leased Line mode User Data Port Transmit Data Data is being sent to the far end device RXD Receive Data Data is being received from the far end device DTR Data Terminal Ready Shows the current state of the DTR control lead This indicator should always be on RTS Request to Send Shows the current state of the RTS control lead This indicator should always be on May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Device Messages These messages appear in the messages area at the bottom of the screens All device messages are listed in alphabetical order Table 5 5 Device Messages 1 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do Access level is n User s access level is 2 No action is needed Read only or 3 user is not authorized to change configurations Already Active Test selected is already Allow test to continue running m Select another test m Stop the test Blank Entries New had been selected m No action is needed Removed from the Administer Logins screen no entry was made then Save was selected Reenter the Login ID Password and Access Level Cannot delete Trap Delete was selected fr
186. hold of 1 devHealthAndStatus mib May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults RMON Alarm and Event Defaults 9123 A2 GB20 00 The FrameSaver unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event information Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor When the threshold set for the monitored variable is exceeded an SNMP trap or a log event is sent Event Defaults Since all events sent are under the control of the FrameSaver unit there is no need to define multiple events for each alarm type so only the following two events need to be generated eventIndex eventDescription eventType eventCommunity 1 Default SLV Rising Event log and trap 4 0 2 Default SLV Falling Event log and trap 4 0 The alarm default tables starting on the next page show how each RMON default alarm is set by the FrameSaver unit shows the alarm and event types the interval used when generating alarms and thresholds Physical Interface Alarm Defaults Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area m DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area See Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps for information about how traps work and Traps RMON Specific for traps specific to remote monitoring Rising Event Operation If a rising threshold is crossed during the interval shown in a table e g frames dropped by the network the event is armed and an alarm is generated at the end of the inter
187. how to schedule automatic element discovery updates to the database 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 9 3 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Configuring the Discovered Elements Network Health sets the speed for discovered elements when it polls the unit for the first time For a FrameSaver FLEX unit the speed set would be the unit s CIR No additional configuration should be required However you should verify that all appropriate information has been retrieved NOTE If an FLEX unit does not have CIR configured or if it is not configured correctly Network Health sets the unit s CIR to O kbps For this reason you should reconfigure the unit s CIR before Network Health polls it If 0 kbps is the speed setting you will need to edit the unit s CIR from Network Health Additional information that can be edited as well See Discovering Elements in the Network Health User Guide for additional information B gt Procedure To change the CIR for FrameSaver FLEX unit elements from Network Health 1 Select the Edit Before Saving button at the bottom of the Discovering dialog box once the discovery process is completed The Poller Configuration window opens Double click on the first element discovered The Modify Element dialog box opens In the Speed box select the Override radio button and enter the CIR for the unit in the text box Letters k and m can be used as shortcuts e g enter 56 k for 56 kilobits per
188. ial feature you can set up two FrameSaver units that are connected back to back without frame relay switches between them asin a test bench setup Changing Operating Mode When setting up back to back operation m One unit must be configured for Standard operation which is the setting for normal operation m The other unit must be configured for Back to Back operation so it presents the network side of the UNI user network interface Only one of the units will have its operating mode changed B Procedure To set up back to back operation 1 On the unit to be configured for Back to Back operation manually configure DLCls DLCls should be configured before connecting the two units 2 Access the Change Operating Mode screen Main Menu Control Change Operating Mode 3 Select Back to Back Operation and respond Yes to the Are you sure prompt 4 Save the change B Procedure To return the unit to normal operation 1 Return to the Change Operating Mode screen and switch back to Standard Operation 2 Respond Yes to the prompt and save the change The units can be reconnected to a standard frame relay network 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 15 Configuration Configuration Option Tables Configuration option descriptions contained in this chapter are in menu order even though this may not be the order in which you access each when configuring the unit The following configuration option tables are included T
189. ics You can also display LEDs and FrameSaver unit identity information Test Select and cancel tests for the FrameSaver unit s interfaces Configuration Display and edit the configuration options Auto Configuration Configure basic access unit setup automatically based upon a selected application You can also automatically populate network and data port DLCI configuration options with numeric settings Control Control the menu driven user interface device naming login administration and selecting software releases You can also initiate a power on reset of the FrameSaver unit Easy Install Select Leased Line or Frame Relay mode for minimal configuration and a quick installation See Appendix A Menu Hierarchy for a pictorial view of the menu hierarchy which represents the organization of the FrameSaver unit s menus and screens May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 User Interface and Basic Operation Screen Work Areas There are two user work areas m Screen area Where you input information into fields Function keys area Where you perform specific screen functions Model Number Menu Path Date and Time main config system slv 9123 C SLV Device Name Node A 02 25 2000 23 32 Device SERVICE LEVEL VERIFICATION SYSTEM OPTIONS Name SLV Sample Interval secs SLV Delivery Ratio DLCI Down on SLV Timeout Screen SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold Area SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold SLV Packet
190. ide of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI Inbound Heartbeat T2 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 15 Configures the LMI defined T2 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI Applies to the network side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI N4 Measurement Period T3 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 20 Configures the LMI defined T3 parameter which is the time interval in seconds that the network side of the LMI uses to measure the maximum number of status enquiry messages that have been received N4 from the user side 5 30 Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 19 Configuration Configuring Service Level Verification Options SLV options are selected from the System menu see Table 3 2 Main Menu Configuration System Service Level Verification To configure these options Service Type on the Easy Install screen must be set to Frame Relay Table 3 2 Service Level Verification Options 1 of 2 SLV Sample Interval secs Possible Settings 10 3600 Default Setting 60 Sets the inband communications interval between FrameSaver FLEX and SLV devices
191. iguring Telnet and or FTP Session Support in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about setting Telnet configuration options 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 4 5 Security and Logins Limiting FTP Access FTP access can be limited by Disabling FTP access completely m Requiring a user ID and password to login m Limiting FTP bandwidth B Procedure To limit FTP access when the session is not on the TS Management Link 1 Select the Telnet and FTP Session options Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable FTP FTP Session to Disable Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login If you want to allow users to configure the unit or perform file transfers including downloads keep the access at Level 1 Level 1 access is required to download software to the unit or to upload or download configuration files Level 3 is sufficient for NMS access for SLV historical information Limit bandwidth for FTP FTP Max Transfer Rate to a rate less than the network line speed typically less than or equal to the CIR This method is not recommended if SLV reports are desired since FTP is required to generate the reports 3 Save your changes See Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support in C
192. ing Communication with a Misconfigured Unit Misconfiguring the unit could render the menu driven user interface inaccessible If this occurs connectivity to the unit can be restored via a directly connected asynchronous terminal B Procedure To reset COM port settings 1 Configure the asynchronous terminal to operate at 19 2 kbps using character length of 8 bits with one stop bit and no parity In addition set Flow Control to None 2 Reset the unit then hold the Enter key down until the System Paused screen appears See Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication for other methods of resetting the unit 3 Tab to the desired prompt and type y Yes at one of the prompts If selecting The following occurs Reset COM Port usage Port Use is set to Terminal so the asynchronous terminal can be used Data Rate Kbps Character Length Stop Bits and Parity are reset to the factory defaults Unit resets itself Reload Factory Defaults All configuration and control settings are reset to the Default Factory Configuration overwriting the current configuration Unit resets itself CAUTION This causes the current configuration to be destroyed and a self test to be performed If no selection is made within 30 seconds or if No n is entered the unit resets itself and no configuration changes are made Once the unit resets itself connectivity is restored and the Main Menu screen appears 6 4 May 2000 9
193. ing the Discovered Elements 0a 9 4 m Grouping Elements for Reports cece cece eee teens 9 5 m Generating Reports fora Group 0 cc eee 9 6 About Service Level Reports 000 cece cece eee ees 9 6 About At a Glance Reports 0 c cece cee 9 6 About Trend Reports 43 na a4 ka cee BG bid APA Ab MAA HA 9 7 PAM REDOND AA AA 9 7 Reports Applicable to FLEX and SLV Devices 9 7 A Menu Hierarchy 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 Vv Contents B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Mga AA re ree ane a eee mere eer ee B 2 Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps 0 0 a B 2 System CLOUD TI onxeceadeseave e454 BA seane ees ad ea eae es pa Fes B 3 FrameSaver Unit s sysDescr system 1 B 3 FrameSaver Unit s sysObjectID system 2 B 3 m nterfaces Group mib 2 awa ede MAA KANAL RN KAG PT ANDA GAAN L AANI B 4 Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable B 4 NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable B 5 m Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps 00 cece cece eee B 6 Bie UND maaawa Pam 4 9 oR h ses hss bod e544 esse GRee tents B 7 Trap authenticationFailure 2cncveeneuesaeteesesd duces noses ues B 7 Traps linkUp and linkDown 2 2a vee KA stew teeters eoew ious uals B 8 Traps enterprise Specific cake AT KANG LAT RG EAT congeners B 11 Traps RMON Specific 22 02 ccc
194. ink Sublayer Synchronous Data Port Service Side of the Frame Relay UNI Supported by the media specific Frame Relay Services MIB Network ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib iflndex RFC 1573 IfAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib ifindex RFC 1573 IfAdminStatus not possible over the Ethernet port Strings ifString down SifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown linkUp Communication on the port is restored String ifString up linkDown LMI is down for the LMI Protocol configured or Frame Relay link is disabled ifString LMI down No alarms exist on the link e g Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay link Port 1 LMI down ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown linkUp LMI is up or Frame Relay link is enabled String SifString up linkDown LMI is down for the LMI Protocol configured or Frame Relay link is disabled DTE Side of the RFC 1573 T a ery ary ifOperStatus RFC 1573 ifString LMI down Supported by the detects es media specific Frame devLastTrapString SifString administratively Relay DTE s MIB devHealthAndStatus shutdown Due to an y mib intentional shutdown linkUp LMI is up or Frame Relay link is
195. ion keys 2 5 2 6 Invert Transmit Clock IN 4 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 default destination 3 43 node information 3 42 Ping test 6 28 Routing Table Validation NMS IP Address Ethernet port 3 57 limiting SNMP access 4 10 NMS number Node 3 43 K keyboard keys keys keyboard screen function L Lamp Test last reset latency 1 7 Leased Line mode LEDs and control leads displaying 5 3 descriptions network interface limiting asynchronous terminal access FTP access SNMP access through IP addresses 4 10 Telnet access Line Build Out LBO 3 23 Coding Format 3 23 Framing Format 3 23 Loopback 6 21 Link Destination 3 41 frame relay statistics Source 3 40 Traps 3 56 Traps Interfaces 3 56 troubleshooting management TS Management 3 44 9123 A2 GB20 00 Index linkUp and linkDown events 3 56 traps B 8 LLB 6 21 6 24 LMI and PVC availability Behavior 3 17 Clearing Event N3 3 18 3 35 configuring frame relay and Down 5 15 6 8 6 9 Error Event N2 3 18 3 35 _ frame relay statistics Heartbeat T1 3 19 8 35 Inbound Heartbeat T2 3 19 3 36 N4 Measurement Period T3 3 19 3 36 OK control lead 5 6 packet utility 6 5 Parameters 3 35 pass through Protocol Status Enquiry N1 3 18 3 35 uploading packet capture data local external DTE loopbac
196. is Active Select ResetMon to reset the monitor pattern error counter CAUTION You should not run these tests with frame relay equipment attached you must disconnect the frame relay equipment and use external test equipment 6 20 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Line Loopback 9123 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting The local Line Loopback LLB loops the information received on the selected interface back to the source of the loopback When used with a pattern test at the remote node LLB determines whether the problem is with the sending device or the T1 facility Main Menu gt Test Network Physical Tests Other T1 All Interface 1S The T1 Interface 97 15336 CAUTION This test may affect the operation of the frame relay PVCs assigned to the selected port While in loopback the frame relay link will be down so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted An LLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active m Payload Loopback Send Remote Line Loopback or an active Monitor Pattern on this network interface Send Pattern test on this network interface May 2000 6 21 Troubleshooting Payload Loopback The local Payload Loopback PLB loops the information received on the selected interface back to the network after it has passed through the receive and transmit framing section of the device Use the PLB to determine whether the problem is with the T1 facility or in th
197. isable Default Setting Disable Determines whether a user ID and password referred to as the login is required in order to log on to the asynchronous terminal connected to the COM port Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Enable Requires a login to access the menu driven user interface Disable Does not requires a login 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 59 Configuration 3 60 Table 3 16 Communication Port Options 3 of 4 Port Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies level of user access privilege for an asynchronous terminal connected to the COM port If a login is required for the port the effective access level is determined by the user s access level When a login is not required the effective access level is determined by this option NOTE The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the port or the user For example if the Port Access Level assigned is Level 2 but the User Access Level is Level 3 then only level 3 access will be permitted for the port Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Level 1 Allows full access and control of the device including monitoring diagnostics and configuration The user can add change and display configuration options and perform device testing CAUTION Before changing the communication port s
198. ive and you are attempting to access the unit over the COM port using a terminal or external modem not via Telnet the User Interface Already In Use screen is redisplayed In addition the type of connection Telnet Connection or Direct COM Port Connection for each current user is identified along with the user s login ID B gt Procedure To end the session 1 Press Ctrl a to switch to the function keys area of the screen 2 Type e Exit and press Enter Fora terminal connected to the COM port the session is ended Fora modem connected to the COM port the session is ended and the modem is disconnected Fora Telnet connection the session is closed and if no other Telnet or FTP session is occurring over the connection the modem is disconnected If ending a session from the Configuration branch see Saving Configuration Options in Chapter 3 Configuration 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 2 3 User Interface and Basic Operation Main Menu 2 4 Entry to all of the FrameSaver unit s tasks begins at the Main Menu which has six menus or branches The Access Level at the top of the screen only appears when security has been set up main Access Level 1 9123 C SLV Device Name Node A 02 25 2000 23 32 MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Control Easy Install Ctrl a to access these functions Select To Status View diagnostic tests interfaces PVC connections and statist
199. ive seconds For managed networks use the Dedicated Network Management Link that was created The menu structure and selections and the features and functions of the FrameSaver unit are changed based upon the type of service being used May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configurati On If the selection is The unit is configured to operate in Leased Line Leased line mode for connection to a standard leased line service This mode provides a simple and straight forward up remote access to the unit When operating in leased line mode no frame relay related available NOTE If previously set to Frame Relay then changed to Leased Line all frame relay related screens and user All frame relay links DLCls and PVCs are preserved In the case of time slots all Frame Relay Network 1 FrameRly1 time slot assignments are converted to S1Port 1 on the Sync Data Port Assignments screen Frame Relay Frame Relay aware mode for connection to a frame relay service This is the default operational mode and it is used to default configure the FrameSaver unit in frame relay mode so that frame relay parameters and SLV functionality can be set up When operating in frame relay mode all frame relay related statuses performance statistics tests configuration options and control features are available NOTE If previously set to Leased Line then changed to Frame Relay Time Slot Discovery is tempo
200. k 9123 A2 GB20 00 A network initiated Data Channel Loopback DCLB that loops data over the frame relay link DSOs received on the network interface through the FrameSaver unit s framing circuitry and back to the same interface A DCLB can be controlled over the frame relay link using one of the following in band methods m V 54 Loopback m ANSI 71 403 Annex B Fractional T1 FT1 Channel Loopback The frame relay service provider can use DCLB to verify the integrity of the frame relay circuit T1 All Interface 1s 98 16223 CAUTION V 54 and FT1 Loopbacks may affect the operation of the frame relay PVCs assigned to the selected port While in loopback the frame relay link will be down so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted May 2000 6 25 Troubleshooting Send and Monitor Pattern Tests The pattern tests enable a FrameSaver unit to either send or monitor a known bit pattern These tests generate industry standard bit patterns that can be used to determine whether information is being correctly transmitted across a circuit The following test patterns are available QRSS 511 All zeros 2047 All ones 2E15 1 219 1 1 in 8 2E20 1 220 1 3 in 24 User defined 2 byte test pattern a0a0 63 A Send Pattern test cannot be started when the following tests are running m Any Loopback on the same interface m Send FT1 Loopback or Data Channel
201. k locked out 4 3 4 11 6 4 LOF LED 5 5 logging in logging out Login creating 4 11 ID 4 11 modifying and deleting Required 3 50 B 59 3 4 5 4 6 Loopback Data Channel DTE FT1 6 25 Line 6 21 Payload 6 22 Port DTE Initiated PVC Remote 6 24 Repeater 6 23 V 54 LOS at Network 5 15 6 9 LED 5 4 5 5 linkDown trap Loss of Signal linkDown trap May 2000 IN 5 Index M MAC address Main Menu screen branch 2 4 making input selections Management and Communication options 3 42 General SNMP options OpenLane system PVCs 3 46 total number dedicated SNMP troubleshooting link menu branches Configuration main path 2 5 selecting from Menus A 1 messages Device Health and Status 5 14 Self Test Results system System and Test Status Test Status MIB access downloading support Mode changing Operating demos Test model number modifying a login 4 12 Monitor DTR Pattern 6 19 RTS monitoring DLCI history data FrameSaver unit LEDs and control leads using NetScout Manager Plus 8 16 Multiplexed DLCI 3 40 3 41 3 48 DLCI Type 3 37 PVCs 6 19 IN 6 N N1 LMI Status Enquiry 3 18 3 35 N2 LMI Error Event 3 18 3 35 N3 LMI Clearing Event 3 18 Name 3 46 1 or 2 Access Access 3 49 3 50 Community 3 49 navigating the screens Net Link Port Use 3 58
202. ke SNMP and Auto Configuration Since multiple sessions can be active at the same time the last change made overwrites any previous or current changes being made For instance Saving your configuration changes would cause configuration changes made via another method to be lost If you are making changes and someone else makes changes and saves them your changes would be lost 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 7 Configuration Using the Easy Install Feature The Easy Install feature allows the FrameSaver unit to be installed like a standard leased line SNMP DSU CSU Once the unit is installed and minimal configuration is completed using this feature the NOC Network Operation Center can complete configuration of the unit and verify the setup Main Menu 5 Easy Install Easy Install Screen Example main easy install Device Name Node A EASY INSTALL Service Type Frame Relay 9123 C SLV 3 26 2000 23 32 Node IP Address 000 000 000 000 Clear Node Subnet Mask 000 000 000 000 Clear TS Access DLCI 980 Create a Dedicated Network Management Link Ethernet Port Options Screen Time Slot Assignment Screen Network 1 Line Framing Format Network 1 Line Build Out LBO Network 1 Line Coding Format DSO Base Rate Kbps Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu Save To access the unit MainMenu Exit For non managed networks use the TS Access DLCI to ping the unit five times within f
203. le 5 8 Test Status Messages 2 of 2 Message What It Indicates Send Pitn Active DLCI nnnn The unit is monitoring the selected test pattern on frame_relay_link 1 2 the specified DLCI for the interface Send Pttn Active Interface A Send Pattern test is active on the specified interface This test cannot be activated on user data ports that have Port Use set to Frame Relay nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port Network LMI Reported DLCIs Status Network LMI reported DLCI statuses are selected from the Status menu Main Menu gt Status LMI Reported DLCIs The LMI Reported DLCls screen displays the status and CIR if supported by the switch for each DLCI whether the DLCI is configured or not This screen only appears when Service Type is set to Frame Relay LMl Reported DLClIs Status Screen Example main status lmi_ dlcis 9123 C SLV Device Name Node A 3 26 2000 23 32 frame relay link LMI REPORTED DLCIs Page 1 of 2 STATUS CIR bps STATUS CIR bps 300 Active 16000 Active 32000 305 Inactive Active 32000 400 Deleted Deleted 410 Inactive Active 32000 411 Inactive Active 32000 420 Inactive Active 32000 430 Active 501 Inactive 511 Active 256000 520 Active 64000 DLCI is configured on the Frame Relay Link
204. le B 2 NetScout Interface Objects Information Frame Relay Logical Layer Frame relay logical link on the network interface Frame Relay 1 Network For the DTE side 1 RMON IN OUT Network T1 of FR DTE T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the DCE side RMON IN OUT Network T1 of FR SERVICE T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the user side 3 RMON IN OUT Synchronous Data Port of FR DTE Slot 1 Port 1 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the network side RMON IN OUT Synchronous Data Port of FR SERVICE Slot 1 Port 1 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh m For the DCE DTE IN RMON IN fName of the 17 48 interface OUT RMON OUT ifName of the interface calculated value 1 RMON Virtual These values are ALL VIRTUAL PVC 65 512 Interfaces calculated based on interface number the probe s internal DLCI number ALL circuit index circuit index 65 RMON Virtual These values are IN VIRTUAL PVC 513 1023 Logical calculated interface number Interfaces For the DTE DLCI number DTE virtual interface ifIndex 65 2 4513 OUT VIRTUAL PVC interface number For the DCE DLCI number DCE DTE calculated value 1 May 2000 B 5 Synchronous Data Port 1 Frame Relay 3 Sync Data Port 1 RMON Logical Layer RMON Frame These values are Relay Logical calculated Interfaces m
205. lect System and Test Status from the Status menu Path To provide a check point that coincides with the menu path shown at the top of the screen Always shown within parentheses so you can verify that you are referencing the correct table e g Path main config alarm Brackets To indicate multiple selection choices when multiple options can be displayed e g Clear Network Port 1 Statistics Text highlighted in red To indicate a hyperlink to additional information when viewing this manual online Click on the highlighted text x May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 About the FrameSaver FLEX 9123 This chapter includes the following m System Overview FrameSaver FLEX Feature Sets Basic FLEX Features Advanced FLEX SLV Features OpenLane SLM System NetScout Manager Plus and NetScout Probes System Overview Our System Solution consists of m FrameSaver FLEX units m OpenLane SLM system NetScout Manager Plus application m Standalone NetScout Probes if needed This solution provides increased manageability monitoring and diagnostics so customers can identify problems more efficiently troubleshoot those problems faster and maximize their network to control costs It is also compatible with Concord Communication s Network Health software FrameSaver FLEX 9123 units operate with other FrameSaver devices and when teamed with FrameSaver devices in multinational applications provide a complete gl
206. loaded software version and the new release that was Just transferred are shown If the download failed Invalid appears in the Alternate Release field instead of the new release number Repeat the procedure in Upgrading System Software if this occurs 2 Select Switch amp Reset 3 Enter Yes to the Are you sure prompt The unit resets and begins installing the newly transferred software 4 Verify that the new software release was successfully installed as the Current Software Revision Main Menu gt Status gt Identity NOTE If someone opens a Telnet session and accesses the units Identity screen while the unit is downloading software the In Progress message appears in the Alternate Software Revision field See Displaying System Information to see what is included on the unit s Identity screen 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 5 43 Operation and Maintenance Transferring Collected Data SLV user history statistics and LMI packet capture data can be uploaded to an NMS or a Network Associates Sniffer using FTP which is faster than other methods The rate at which the data file is transferred is the rate set by the FTP Max Transfer Rate Kbps option see Table 3 12 Telnet and FTP Session Options in Chapter 3 Configuration NOTES Use your NMS application to FTP and view transferred statistics and packet data the data files are not in user readable format LMI packet capture data can also be viewed via the LMI T
207. lowing information is available TruePut Technology using Frame and Data Delivery Ratios Web browser access to all diagnostic and reporting functions Historical SLA Service Level Agreement verification and trend reports Real time RMON remote monitoring alarms and configurable alarm thresholds Real time and historical network performance graphs Multiplexed customer PVCs See Advanced FLEX SLV Features for other features and more information about the additional SLV capability If the unit does not have the additional SLV features it can be upgraded to FLEX SLV capability at any time by ordering a FrameSaver FLEX 9123 SLV Activation Certificate The certificate can be ordered for a single unit or for many units You must have the OpenLane SLM system to activate the additional FLEX SLV features in the unit May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 9123 A2 GB20 00 About the FrameSaver FLEX 9123 To obtain an activation certificate provide the model to be upgraded i e 9123 your OpenLane system license key number and the number of FrameSaver units to be upgraded to FLEX SLV capability When you receive your certificate it will include a FLEX Activation Certificate number the Feature Group Number for the additional SLV features Feature Group 2 your OpenLane license key number and the number of device activations license keys ordered When ready to activate FLEX SLV capability in the unit s run the OpenLane S
208. lso appear at the bottom of any menu driven user interface screen Performance statistics Performance Siatistics in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance to help you determine how long a problem has existed Alarm conditions that will Alarms on page 6 7 generate an SNMP trap SNMP traps Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Traps supported include warm start authentication failure enterprise specific those specific to the unit link up and link down 6 2 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication You can reset the unit in one of four ways Reset it from the Control menu Cycle the power Reset the configuration options for the COM port or reload the factory default settings Set the appropriate MIB object from NMS see your NMS documentation The unit performs a self test when it is reset Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu Use this procedure to initiate a reset and power on self test of the unit B Procedure To reset the unit from the Control menu 1 2 From the Main Menu screen select Control Select Reset Device and press Enter The Are You Sure prompt appears Type y Yes and press Enter The unit reinitializes itself performing a self test Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power 9123 A2 GB20 00 Disconnecting then reconnecting the power cord resets the unit May 2000 6 3 Troubleshooting Restor
209. lt Setting 10 Configures the LMI defined T1 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages on the user side of the LMI Applies to the user side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 35 Configuration Table 3 6 Interface Frame Relay Options 3 of 3 LMI Inbound Heartbeat T2 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 15 Configures the LMI defined T2 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI Applies to the network side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI N4 Measurement Period T3 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 20 Configures the LMI defined T3 parameter which is the time interval in seconds that the network side of the LMI uses to measure the maximum number of status enquiry messages that have been received N4 from the user side 5 30 Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5 Frame Relay DSOs Base Rate Possible Settings Nx64 Nx56 Default Setting Nx64 Selects the base rate for the DSOs allocated to frame relay on the network interface Display Conditions This option only appears for the network interface Nx
210. lts Traps linkUp and linkDown B 8 These traps are supported on the following interfaces Physical sublayer interfaces network Ethernet and synchronous data ports Frame relay logical link layer interfaces Table B 5 linkUp and linkDown Traps Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause linkDown A failure in one of the A failure in one of the communication interfaces communication interfaces has has occurred occurred linkUp One of the failed One of the failed communication communication interfaces is interfaces is up and operational up and operational Their linkUp and linkDown variable bindings are in Table B 6 Physical and logical sublayers are represented by the entry in the MIB Il Interfaces Table It is supported by a combination of the Frame Relay Extension MIB and either the Frame Relay Services MIB or the Frame Relay DTEs MIB May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 6 linkUp and linkDown Variable Bindings 1 of 2 Interface Physical Sublayer Network Supported by the media specific DS1 MIB Synchronous Data Port Supported by the media specific RS232 like MIB Variable Bindings iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib iflndex RFC 1573 IfAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib Possible Cause
211. me relay data because it inserts errors in the data traffic Disable Disables bit stuffing Ones density is not enforced on data sent to the network Transmit Timing o O Possible Settings System Interface Transmit Timing Default Setting System Allows transmit timing to be selected from either the system master clock source or from the currently selected interface System Transmit timing is derived from the current system clock source see Table 3 3 General System Options Interface Transmit timing is derived from this interface NOTE When Interface is configured the clock must be synchronized to the system clock source Network Initiated LLB Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Allows the initiation and termination of the line loopback LLB to be controlled by the receipt of LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands from the network Enable LLB is controlled by LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands Receiving a LLB Actuate command causes the FrameSaver unit to enter a line loopback provided an LLB can be performed in the FrameSaver unit s current state Receiving an LLB Release command terminates the LLB Disable The FrameSaver unit ignores the LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands NOTE When disabled the system is not in compliance with ANSI T1 403 or AT amp T TR 62411 3 24 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 4 Network Physical Interface Options 3
212. n DLCI is selected from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics DLCI This screen only appears when Service Type is set to Frame Relay Table 5 13 DLCI Performance Statistics 1 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates It Indicates pa Up Since Date and time that the a was last declared Active after a period of inactivity Down is displayed if the DLCI is inactive If the DLCI was Down this is the time that the DLCI recovered If the DLCI was never Down this is the first time the unit discovered that the DLCI was active in the network DLCI Up Time Days hours minutes and seconds since the DLCI was last declared Active after a period of inactivity Down is displayed if the DLCI is inactive If the DLCI was Down this is the amount of time since the DLCI recovered If the DLCI was never Down this is the amount of time since the unit discovered that the DLCI was active in the network Total Tx Frames Total number of data frames and octets 8 bit bytes Tx Octets transmitted for the selected DLCI on the frame relay link a Within CIR m The number of frames and octets sent by the far end device for on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were within the committed information rate Between The number of frames and octets sent by the far end device CIR amp EIR on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were between the committed information rate and excess in
213. n Protocol RIP is used to enable routing of management data between devices Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link None No routing is used Standard out The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing information about other FrameSaver units in the network Standard RIP messages received on this link are ignored NOTE The router must be configured to receive RIP on the port connected to the COM port configured as the management interface e g Cisco config t router RIP int serialx IP RIP Receive version 1 ct1 z WR To create this management interface make sure that Node or COM port IP Information has been set up see Configuring Node IP Information 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 61 Configuration Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem Select External Modem Com Port to display or change the configuration options that control call processing for an external device attached to the COM port see Table 3 17 Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication gt External Modem Com Port NOTE A standard ElA 232 crossover cable is required when connecting an external modem to the FrameSaver units COM port See Standard EIA 232 D Crossover Cable in Appendix C Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments for cable pin assignments Table 3 17 External Modem COM Port Options External Modem Commands Possible Settings Disabl
214. n performed in leased line mode When five IP Ping tests are run consecutively within a 5 second period the unit automatically switches to frame relay mode so frame relay parameters can be entered and setup can be completed B Procedure 1 To ping any far end FrameSaver unit 1 Select the IP Ping test Main Menu 5 Test gt IP Ping 2 Enter the IP Address of the device the ping is being sent to then select Start NOTE If the FrameSaver unit has just initialized or the far end unit has just initialized it may take about a minute for the units to learn the routes via the proprietary RIP If accessing the unit remotely to enter or change frame relay parameters send the ping five times in a row in rapid succession the unit will be operating in frame relay mode 3 Verify the results of the IP Ping test While the test is running In Progress appears in the Status field When the test is finished Alive Latency nn ms should appear as the Status nn being the amount of time the test took in milliseconds If any other message is displayed additional testing will be required 6 28 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 9123 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting B gt Procedure 2 To ping the NMS at the central site 1 Verify that the central site NMS has the FrameSaver unit s IP address in its routing table so it can communicate with the FrameSaver unit Verify that the central site NMS s router has the FrameSaver unit
215. nable See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about SNMP management configuration options B Procedure To limit SNMP access through IP addresses 1 Select the SNMP NMS Security options Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication gt SNMP NMS Security 2 Select and set the following configuration options as appropriate Enable IP address checking Specify the number between 1 and 10 of SNMP management systems that are authorized to send SNMP messages to the FrameSaver unit Specify the IP address es that identifies the SNMP manager s authorized to send SNMP messages to the unit Specify the access allowed for an authorized NMS when IP address validates is performed 3 Save your changes 4 10 May 2000 Set the configuration option NMS IP Validation to Enable Number of Managers to the desired number NMS n IP Address to the appropriate IP address Access Level to Read or Read Write 9123 A2 GB20 00 Security and Logins See Configuring SNMP NMS Security Options in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about SNMP NMS Security configuration options Creating a Login A login is required if security is enabled Up to six login ID password combinations can be created using ASCII text and each login must have a specified access level Logins must be unique and they are case sensitive B gt Procedure To cr
216. nager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window 2 Select the Custom radio button from the Properties File area in the upper right of the window then Property down the center of the screen The Custom Property Editor window opens see the window in Editing Alarms 3 Select a DLCI from the Trap list and select the Add button to the right of the list The Add Trap window opens Add Trap Domain exe DLCI E EA State Type Ethernet Stats E Trap Yariable Drop Events Jian Absolute _ Delta Rising _ Falling Both Rising Falling Threshold lp Severity 4 p ww Ci jm Description Rising Threshold Reached Falling Threshold Reached Community public public Trap Number Check every BO seconds Cancel 8 8 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 9123 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices 4 Click on the button to the right of indicated fields for a drop down list from which selections can be made Minimally configure the following fields Domain User Defined EU DLCI number for trap being assigned Stats Type PARADYNE Trap Variable Trap variable to be configured The iflndex for the frame relay logical interface is 1 Key2 DLCI number same as DLCI above Absolute or Delta radio button Rising Falling or Both radio button 2 Threshold Value that will trigger a trap 1 Latency MIB variables should be Absolute all others should be Delta
217. nd availability measurements to determine network performance and whether SLAs Service Level Agreements are being met along with SLA reporting RMON Alarms and Configurable Alarm Thresholds Provides the ability to change SLA parameter and RMON alarm thresholds via the OpenLane system to correct them in real time before the SLA is violated Multiplexed Customer PVCs Provides a method of multiplexing customer management data and user data with network management data transparently over a single PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit when FrameSaver devices are at each end of the circuit FTP User History Poller Provides a bulk collector using FTP through the OpenLane system that generates a file for data at the time that data is uploaded using FTP RMON Based User History Statistics Gathering Provides everything needed to monitor network service levels plus throughput with accurate data delivery network latency and LMI and PVC availability Continuous roundtrip latency testing and reporting as well as CIR to transmitted and received data performance statistics are included In addition port bursting statistics are kept for all frame relay links for accurate calculation of utilization Network User History Synchronization Allows correlation of RMON2 User History statistics among all SLV devices in a network Using a central clock called the network reference time all SLV device user history statistics are synchronized across the netwo
218. nection no DLCls are available on the network link which is a suitable PVC Destination New was selected from the PVC Connection Table but all configured DLCls have been connected New was selected from the Management PVCs option screen but all Link DLCI pairs have been connected New was selected from the Management PVCs option screen but all configured DLCls have been connected DLCI Records was selected from an interface s Configuration Edit Display menu and no DLCI Records have been created for this interface New or CopyFrom was selected from an interface s DLCI Records configuration screen and the maximum number of DLCI Records had already been reached May 2000 Operation and Maintenance Do not create the management PVC m Delete another management PVC and try again Do not create the PVC connection m Delete another PVC connection and try again Enter another 4 character name for the logical management link Configure additional DLCls for the network link and try again No action needed or configure more DLCls and try again Configure more network and or Port 1 Links DLCls pairs and try again Configure more network and or Port 1 DLCls and try again Select New and create a DLCI record Delete a DLCI then create the new DLCI Record 5 9 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 5 Device Messages 4 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do No Primar
219. nes all time slots not cross connected to other ports to determine which time slots are being used by the network for frame relay traffic These time slots are set to FrameRly1 This is the factory default When disabled time slot assignments must be manually configured 3 If Time Slot Discovery is disabled assign network time slots for use by frame relay service link 1 by typing FrameRly1 in the selected Network field 4 Repeat Step 3 until all desired time slots are assigned 5 Save the configuration 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 31 Configuration Assigning the Synchronous Data Port to Network Time Slots If Service Type is set to Leased Line the Sync Data Port Assignment screen appears Use this screen to assign the synchronous data port to network interface time slots Follow one of the following menu selection selections Main Menu Configuration Time Slot Assignment gt Sync Data Port Assignments or Main Menu Easy Install gt Time Slot Assignment Screen When Service Type is set to Leased Line Synchronous Data Port Assignment Screen Example main config tslot assign sync data net 9123 C SLV Device Name Node A 2 24 2000 23 32 SYNC DATA PORT ASSIGNMENT Assign To Net1 N01 N02 N03 N04 NO05 NO6 N07 NO08 Assigned Assigned Assigned Assigned Assigned Port 1 Port 1 Assigned N09 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 Assigned Assigned Assigned Assigned Assigned Port 1 Port 1 Available N17 N118 N19
220. nk Main Menu Test Network PVC Tests Selecting Connectivity sends a frame to the FrameSaver unit at the other end of the PVC ARndTrip Time ms message appears in the Result column when a response is received within 5 seconds indicating that the FrameSaver unit at the remote end is alive operational and connected and the round trip RT time is shown in milliseconds ms with a resolution of 1 ms If a response is not received within 5 seconds No Response appears in the Result column 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 6 19 Troubleshooting Physical Tests A FrameSaver 9123 unit s physical tests screen for the network interface is shown below Main Menu 5 Test gt Network Physical Tests Data Port Physical Tests This example shows the Network Physical Tests screen for the model with 64 PVCs and the FLEX SLV upgrade Physical Tests Screen Example main test network 9123 C SLV Device Name Node A 3 26 2000 23 32 NETWORK 1 PHYSICAL TESTS Test Command Status Results Local Loopbacks Line Loopback Inactive Payload Loopback Inactive Repeater Loopback Inactive Remote Loopbacks Send Line Loopback Inactive Pattern Tests Send user defined 0a0a Active 00 Errors 99999 Monitor user defined 0a0a 00 Errors 99999 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit InjectErr ResetMon The ResetMon function key at the bottom of the screen only appears when a Monitor 511 test pattern
221. nnection is not fully configured 1 For the circuit to be active both Source and Destination Statuses must be Active 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 5 21 Operation and Maintenance Time Slot Assignment Status Time Slot assignments are made using the Time Slot Assignment configuration option See Assigning Time Slots Cross Connections in Chapter 3 Configuration for making time slot assignments Use the Timeslot Assignment Status screen to display time slot assignments for the network channels Displaying Network Time Slot Assignments Use the Network Timeslot Assignment Status screen to display DSO assignments for each DSO on the network interface Main Menu Status gt Timeslot Assignment Status Network The Network Timeslot Assignment Status screen displays 24 two field entries in three rows Together each two field entry defines the assignment for one network interface time slot The top field represents the time slot of the network interface The bottom field represents the cross connect status of the associated top field network time slot Network Timeslot Assignment Status Screen Example main status timeslot net_display 9123 C SLV Device Name Node A 5 26 1999 23 32 NETWORK 1 TIMESLOT ASSIGNMENT STATUS NO1 N02 N03 N04 NO05 NO6 N07 N08 Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign N09 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 Fram
222. nsmitted If all of the above have been verified and the physical link is not in Alarm contact your network provider Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network port Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port 6 8 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting Table 6 1 Alarm Conditions 3 of 4 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do LMI Down The Local Management For user data port p 2 a Kame RIRUN ain SAna Check that the DTE cable is securely attached at both cont d ends Verify that Transmit Clock Source and Invert Transmit Clock options are properly configured Verify that Frame Relay Performance Statistics show LMI frames being received If no frames are being received Check the attached device Verify that the LMI Protocol setting reflects the LMI type being used LOS at Network 1 A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the network interface Clears when the ratio of ones to zeros received is greater than or equal to 12 5 Network cable problem Check that the network cable is securely attached at both ends No signal is being Check far end FrameSaver transmitted at the far end unit status FrameSaver unit T1 facility problem Contact your network provider Network Com Link The communication link for Check the router connected to Down the COM port is down and the COM port the COM port is configured
223. o stop the test Start reappears and the status of the test changes back to Inactive 7 View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column Use the Abort All Tests selection from the Test menu to abort all tests running on all interfaces with exception to DTE initiated loopbacks To abort individual tests that are active see Starting and Stopping a Test B Procedure 6 16 To abort all tests on all interfaces 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Test 2 Select Abort All Tests and press Enter Command Complete appears when all tests on all interfaces have been stopped NOTE Abort All Tests does not interrupt DT E initiated loopbacks May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 PVC Tests 9123 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting PVC tests can be run on a requested DLCI for a selected interface The FrameSaver unit must be operating in frame relay mode m When PVC tests are on a multiplexed DLCI between FrameSaver devices they are nondisruptive to data so user data can continue to be sent during a test m f the device at one end of the circuit is not a FrameSaver device PVC tests are on a standard DLCI and are disruptive to data Also the Connectivity test would not appear Loopback and send monitor pattern tests are available for each interface on the selected DLCI FrameSaver devices should be at each end of the circuit If a PVC Loopback is started at one end of the circuit the oth
224. obal frame relay management solution 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 1 1 About the FrameSaver FLEX 9123 FrameSaver FLEX Feature Sets 1 2 Depending upon the model ordered the FrameSaver FLEX unit has the basic FrameSaver frame relay and diagnostic capability or it is enhanced with additional SLV Service Level Verification reporting capability These are referred to as feature sets which provide different levels of intelligence for monitoring managing and reporting performance of the unit The two feature sets include Basic FLEX Feature Set Models with this feature set provide basic FLEX capability which includes the following Leased Line mode for standard DSU installation and operation Device Health and Status Layer 1 Physical and Layer 2 Frame Relay performance statistics Basic physical testing and non disruptive PVC diagnostics A troubleshooting DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier for service provider use and remote management Limited RMON Remote Monitoring functionality Multiplexed management PVCs See Basic FLEX Features for other features and additional information Advanced FLEX SLV Feature Set Models with this feature set sometimes referred to as Feature Set or Group 2 provide all the basic FLEX capability plus advanced SLV Service Level Verification features When additional SLV data is collected and the unit is accessed from an OpenLane SLM system Web access to the fol
225. ocations or Paradyne worldwide office locations use one of the following methods Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at www paradyne com Be sure to register your warranty at www paradyne com warranty m Telephone Call our automated system to receive current information by fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 Outside the U S A call 1 727 530 2340 Document Feedback We welcome your comments and suggestions about this document Please mail them to Technical Publications Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Ave N Largo FL 33773 or send e mail to userdoc paradyne com Include the number and title of this document in your correspondence Please include your name and phone number if you are willing to provide additional clarification Trademarks ACCULINK COMSPHERE FrameSaver Hotwire and NextEDGE are registered trademarks of Paradyne Corporation MVL OpenLane Performance Wizard and TruePut are trademarks of Paradyne Corporation All other products and services mentioned herein are the trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks of their respective owners Patent Notification FrameSaver products are protected by U S Patents 5 550 700 and 5 654 966 Other patents are pending A May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Contents About This Guide m Purpose and Intended Audience 2 a vii m Document Organization a lt as2 oc cececa
226. om No action needed or configure Manager the Management PVCs another path for traps and try Options screen but the again PVC had been defined as a trap destination Cannot Save no Security was being setup Set up at least one login with Level 1 Login IDs but all the logins were Access Level 1 so the unit can assigned either Level 2 or be configured Level 3 access Command Complete Configuration has been No action is needed saved or all tests have been aborted Connection Refused Two menu driven user Wait and try again interface sessions are Seen at an FTP already in use when a terminal Telnet session was attempted Destination Not Destination entered is Enter another destination Unique already being used indicator DLCI in connection User tried to delete aDLCI m No action needed or Delete connection first that was part of a connection Delete the connection then delete the DLCI DLCI Number Already The DLCI number entered Enter another DLCI number Exists on the DLCI Record Entry screen has already been created so is not unique DLCI Number User tried to designate a No action is needed Reserved special troubleshooting DLCI 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 5 7 Operation and Maintenance 5 8 Table 5 5 Device Messages 2 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do Duplicate DLCI Number DLCI number entered is not unique for the frame relay link No action is needed
227. omplete NOTE Only Security Access Level 1 users can change configuration options Security Access Level 2 users can only view configuration options and run tests Security Access Level 3 users can only view configuration options they cannot change configuration options or run tests 3 6 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Saving Configuration Options When changes to the configuration options are complete use the Save function key to save your changes to either the Current Customer 1 or Customer 2 configuration areas NOTE When changing settings you must Save for changes to take effect B Procedure To save the configuration option changes 1 Press Ctrl a to switch to the function key area at the bottom of the screen 2 Type s or S to select the Save function and press Enter The Save Configuration To screen appears NOTE If you try to exit the Configuration menu without saving changes a Save Configuration screen appears requiring a Yes or No response lf you select No the Main Menu screen reappears and the changes are not saved If you select Yes the Save Configuration To screen appears 3 Select the configuration option area to which you want to save your changes usually the Current Configuration and press Enter When Save is complete Command Complete appears in the message area at the bottom of the screen NOTE There are other methods of changing configurations li
228. onFailure events only Both Sends trap messages for both warmStart and authenticationFailure events Enterprise Specific Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events are sent to the currently configured trap manager s Enable Sends trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events Disable Does not send trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 55 Configuration 3 56 Table 3 14 SNMP Traps Options 3 of 3 Link Traps Possible Settings Disable Up Down Both Default Setting Both Determines whether SNMP linkDown or linkUp traps are sent to the currently configured trap manager s A linkDown trap indicates that the unit recognizes a failure in one of the interfaces A linkUp trap indicates that the unit recognizes that one of its interfaces is active Use the Link Traps Interface and the DLCI Traps on Interface configuration options to specify which interface will monitor linkUp and linkDown traps messages Disable Does not send linkDown or linkUp trap messages Up Sends trap messages for linkUp events only Down Sends trap messages for linkDown events only Both Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events Link Traps Interfaces Possible Settings Network T1s Ports All Default Setting All Specifies which interfaces will generate linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpeci
229. ored but the DLCI is not declared down SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold Available Settings 1 2 3 4 20 Default Setting 3 Specifies the number of consecutive missed SLV communications that must be detected before a DLCI Inactive status is declared 1 20 Sets the limit for these error events 3 20 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 2 Service Level Verification Options 2 of 2 SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold Available Settings 1 2 3 4 20 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of consecutive SLV messages that must be received before the DLCI Inactive status is cleared 1 20 Sets the limit for the clearing event SLV Packet Size bytes Available Settings 64 2048 Default Setting 64 Sets the size of packets in bytes that will be used for SLV communications SLV packets are used to track latency and other SLV related variables When the packet size is changed a new round trip and average latency calculation must be performed so these measurements will not appear on the SLV Performance Statistics screen until a new sampling interval has occurred 64 2048 Sets the packet size for SLV communications SLV Synchronization Role Available Settings Tributary Controller None Default Setting Tributary Determines the role the unit plays in maintaining synchronization of user history data collection and storage between FLEX and or SLV devices Tributary
230. orting you will want to license the Service Level Reports application This application analyzes data collected over months or by quarters and provides service level information about an enterprise a region department or business process Executive IT Manager and Customer Service Level reports are provided Using these reports you can measure service performance against goals and agreements Ranges for service level goals can be set for up to five variables availability bandwidth bytes health exceptions and latency These ranges need to be set before reports are scheduled About At a Glance Reports At a Glance Reports consolidate various important DLCI and network performance indicators onto a single page Up to ten DLCls can be included in an At a Glance Report For FrameSaver units with the SLV and SLM reporting feature set using the FrameSaver SLV report on page 9 9 you can compare a DLCI s volume with the network s performance over a specified period of time Ranges for service level goals can be set for up to five variables availability bandwidth bytes health exceptions and latency These ranges need to be set before reports are scheduled In addition all the enhanced network statistics that only an SLV enhanced device can accurately collect is provided so you can truly monitor the health of the frame relay network and see the effects of the customer s utilization on network efficiency 9 6 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00
231. pA BAKE KAN K ceedenetacahadeaest B 14 RMON Alarm and Event Defaults a B 15 Physical Interface Alarm Defaults 0 ccc cee ee B 16 Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults 0 ccc ee eeaee B 17 DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area B 19 DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area B 20 m Object ID Cross References Numeric Order B 22 C Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Rear Panel o sno cede ete edie eee eh ae tee keene ketenes bareees es C 1 T1 Network Interface UA hh KA HANLALALLAGEA LG GIRL AO id C 2 T1 Network Cable Feature No 3100 F1 500 C 2 Canadian T1 Line Interface Cable Feature No 3100 F1 510 C 2 E COP NN can ar ee ee ere ee eee ere ere Sere C 3 Standard EIA 232 D Crossover Cable C 4 Data FG AA a ideni C 6 Standard V 35 Straight through Cable 00 e eee eee C 6 m Ethernet Port Connector 2na NAKAKAABALA NEGA NGALAN BKA WA ecard C 7 D Technical Specifications E Equipment List B EID ENa E RE N E ANT E AT E AEAEE ENTE TESTET TTT E 1 Se PRA APP REE EEA RAR E 2 Index vi May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 About This Guide Purpose and Intended Audience Document Organization 9123 A2 GB20 00 This document contains information that applies to the FrameSaver FLEX 9123 unit which supports multiple types of service leased line frame relay and
232. play or change the DLCI s excess burst size 0 1536000 Specifies the DLCI s excess burst size 3 38 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Table 3 7 DLCI Record Options 3 of 3 DLCI Priority Possible Settings Low Medium High Default Setting High Specifies the relative priority for data received on the DLCI from an attached device also known as quality of service All data on Port 1 is cut through as long as there is no higher priority data queued from another user port The DLCI priority set for an interface applies to data coming into that interface For example the priority set for DLCls on Port 1 applies to data coming into Port 1 from the attached equipment such as a router Display Conditions This option is not available for the network interface Low Data configured for the DLCI has low priority Medium Data configured for the DLCI has medium priority High Data configured for the DLCI has high priority Outbound Management Priority Possible Settings Low Medium High Default Setting Medium Specifies the relative priority for management traffic sent on management PVCs on this DLCI to the network Display Conditions This option is not available on a user data port Low Management data configured for the DLCI has low priority Medium Management data configured for the DLCI has medium priority High Management data configured for the DLCI has high priority 9123
233. pports the following traps warmStart authenticationFailure linkUp and linkDown enterprise Specific RMON Specific These traps are listed in alphabetical order within each table B 6 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Trap warmStart SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults This trap indicates that the FrameSaver unit has been reset and has stabilized Table B 3 warmStart Trap Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause warmstart FrameSaver unit has just Reset command sent reinitialized and stabilized itself Variable Binding String Variable Binding Unit reset devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib Power disruption Trap authenticationFailure 9123 A2 GB20 00 This trap indicates that access to the FrameSaver unit was unsuccessful due to lack of authentication Table B 4 authenticationFailure Trap Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause authenticationFailure Access to the FrameSaver SNMP protocol message not unit was attempted and properly authenticated failed ailed m Three unsuccessful attempts were made to enter a correct login user ID password combination m IP Address security is enabled and a message was received from the SNMP Manager whose address was not on the lost of approved managers String Unauthorized access attempted Variable Binding devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib May 2000 B 7 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defau
234. ptions NetScout Manager Plus network interface SLV options System options 3 16 the system Connectivity test IN 2 Control keys lead descriptions Leads Ignore 3 59 Leads and LEDs 5 3 menu branch controlling asynchronous terminal access external device access FTP access SNMP access Telnet access conversation elements copying OpenLane directory 8 2 CRC creating a login 4 11 new PVC connections management links user history files 8 10 cross connections crossover ElA 232 cable CTS down down to Port Device 5 14 current software revision D Data Channel Loopback 3 25 6 25 Delivery Ratio DDR 1 7 Link Control Identifier DLCI Port physical options port connector pin assignments Rate Kbps selection criteria uploading SLV and packet capture Date amp Time setting DCLB DDR 1 7 DE Set Default IP Destination Delete key 2 6 deleting a login 4 12 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Destination 3 55 Default IP DLCI EDLCI Link Device messages troubleshooting problems 6 11 Dial In Access 3 62 disabling SNMP access Discard Eligible DE 3 47 Disconnect Time Minutes 3 52 3 60 discovering elements DLCls Discovery frame relay 1 5 frame relay FR Frame Relay Mode saving a mode change LMI protocol time slot 1 5 time slots 3 29 displaying configuration options identit
235. race Log see Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface in Chapter 6 Troubleshooting for additional information Uploading SLV user history statistics is only available to units with the FLEX SLV feature set B Procedure To retrieve data 1 Initiate an FTP session to the device from which SLV statistics or packet data will be retrieved 2 Type bin to enter binary transfer mode 3 Type hash to enter hash mode if you want to monitor the progress of the upgrade provided this function is supported by your equipment 4 Type cd data to change to the data directory If retrieving Then SLV statistics Perform a get of the uhbcfull dat file m File Transfer Complete Transfer was successful File Transfer Failed Transfer was not successful Try again or end the session LMI packet capture data Stop the LMI Packet Capture Utility Main Menu Control gt LMI Packet Capture Utility LMI packet capture data is not available readable when the LMI Packet Capture Utility is Active Perform a get of the Imitrace syc file One of the following will display for the file File Transfer Complete File Transfer Failed Permission Denied The LMI Packet Capture Utility was not readable Stop the LMI Packet Capture Utility and try again 3 Close the FTP session SLV statistics and or LMI Packet Capture data are now available for reporting 5 44 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00
236. ral SNMP Management e Clear Assignments e Telnet and FTP Session e SNMP NMS Security e SNMP Traps Ethernet Port Communication Port External Modem Com Port A 4 May 2000 MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Control Easy Install MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Control Easy Install 9123 A2 GB20 00 9123 A2 GB20 00 Menu Hierarchy MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Control System Information Administer Logins Select Software Release Disconnect Modem Reset Device Easy Install System Information Administer Logins Select Software Release Device Name e Login ID e Current Release System Name e Password Alternate Release Location Contact e Access Level e Switch amp Reset Date Time New MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Control Easy Install Easy Install Service Type Node IP Address and Subnet Mask TS Access e Create Dedicated Network Management Link Ethernet Port Options Screen e Time Slot Assignment Screen e Selected Network Physical Interface Options 00 16710b May 2000 A 5 Menu Hierarchy A 6 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults This appendix contains the following m MIB Support Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps System Group mib 2 FrameSaver Unit s sysDescr system 1 FrameSaver Unit s sysObjectID system 2 m Interfaces Group mib 2
237. rameSaver node in the same way as you would initiate an FTP to any other IP addressable device NOTE Loading a configuration with many DLCls from a unit s Customer Configuration 1 or 2 option area into its Current Configuration area may take time Allow a minute or more for the downloaded file to be put into the units currently active configuration May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance B Procedure To initiate an FTP session 1 Start the FTP client program on your host For example on a UNIX host type ftp followed by the FrameSaver unit s IP address 2 If a login and password are required see Creating a Login in Chapter 4 Security and Logins you are prompted to enter them If not press Enter The FTP prompt appears The starting directory is the root directory Use standard FTP commands during the FTP session as well as the following remote FTP commands Command Definition cd directory Change the current directory on the FrameSaver node to the specified directory dir directory Print a listing of the directory contents in the specified directory If no directory is specified the current one is used get file file2 Copy a file from the remote directory of the FrameSaver node to the local directory on the host for configuration files only remotehelp Print the meaning of the command If no argument is given a command list of all Known commands is printed Is directory Print an a
238. rarily suspended until LMI communication is reestablished and all frame relay related configuration options previously set up are restored except for the Sync Data Port Assignments In this case all port assignments set to S1Port 1 are converted to FrameRly1 assignments on the Frame Relay Network 1 Assignment timeslot assignment screen screen to guide the installer during initial installation and to set statuses performance statistics tests configuration options or control features are available only physical layer functions are features are filtered so they are transparent to the To see how the FrameSaver unit s menu structure differs based upon the Service Type setting see Appendix A Menu Hierarchy The Service Type setting can be changed on demand When Service Type is changed the Changing Service Type will effect overall device operation Are You Sure prompt appears If you select No no changes are made If you select Yes the edit copy of the system options is updated to reflect the changed mode A Save is required to apply option updates to the current configuration See the FrameSaver FLEX 9123 Installation Instructions for additional information and installation procedures See Product Related Documents in About This Guide for its document number May 2000 3 9 Configuration Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP Using the system s standard Routing Information Protocol RIP feat
239. ration and Maintenance FIP File Transfers Upgrading System Software Determining Whether a Download is Completed Changing Software Transferring Collected Data Displaying System Information Use the Identity screen to view identification information about the FrameSaver unit This information is useful if you are purchasing additional or replacement units and or making firmware upgrades Main Menu gt Status s Identity View this field To find the System Name Domain name for this SNMP managed node up to 255 ASCII characters System Contact Contact person for this SNMP managed node System Location Physical location for this SNMP managed node NAM Type Type of unit installed referred to as a network access module or NAM i e T1 FR NAM This card type is supported by the SNMP SysDescr Object Hardware Revision Unit s hardware version Format nnnn nnx consists of a 4 digit number followed by two digits and one alphabetic character Current Software Revision Software version currently being used by the unit Format nn nn nn consists of a 6 digit number that represents the major and minor revision levels Alternate Software Revision Software version that has been downloaded into the unit but has not yet been implemented Format is the same as for the Current Software Revision m In Progress indicates that the flash memory is currently being downloaded m Invalid indicates that
240. red before a customized user history table can be loaded Use a text editor to create these udh files by Copying one of the interface specific files DLCI or link and editing it using one of the examples provided as a guide m Copying one of the examples provided and editing the extensions to fit the FrameSaver unit CAUTION Two user history table files are already configured and installed in the unit UserHistory1 and UserHistory2 These files must not be modified These two tables are used to keep SLV data for reports It is always a good idea to rediscover agents and their DLCls before starting to be sure your agent and DLCI lists are current To rediscover agents and their DLCls select the Learn button on the NetScout Manager Plus main window the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 9123 A2 GB20 00 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices B Procedure 1 Open a terminal window and go to SNSHOME usr 2 Copy an example or interface specific file to a new file that contains the user history table number 3 Open the new file using a text editor The variables in the file are listed with their OIDs Object IDs The frame relay interface number 101015001 must replace IFN and the DLCI number to be monitored must replace DLCI Example frCircuitSentFrames Change 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 IFN DLCI to 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 101015001 301 The only v
241. relay tests 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI number inclusive DLCI Type Possible Settings Standard Multiplexed Default Setting Multiplexed Specifies whether the DLCI is standard or multiplexed This field is read only when the selected DLCI is used in a PVC or Management link connection and the DLCI Type is Standard Display Conditions This option does not appear for a user data port and it cannot be changed if the DLCI is specified as the TS Access Management Link Standard Supports standard DLCls as specified by the Frame Relay Standards Use this setting when a non FrameSaver unit is at the other end Multiplexed Enables multiplexing of multiple connections into a single DLCI Allows a single PVC through the frame relay network to carry multiple DLCls as long as these connections are between the same two endpoints proprietary Do not select Multiplexed unless there are FrameSaver units at both ends of the connection 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 37 Configuration Table 3 7 DLCI Record Options 2 of 3 CIR bps Possible Settings 0 1536000 Default Setting 64000 Determines the data rate for the DLCI that the network commits to accept and carry without discarding frames the CIR in bits per second Entry of an invalid rate causes the error message Value Out of Range 0 x where x the maximum line rate available on the port 0 1536000 Specifies the network committed data rate Possible Se
242. ribes setup of the NetScout Manager Plus application so it supports FrameSaver units Chapter 9 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Describes setup of Concord s Network Health application so reports can be created for FrameSaver units and identifies those reports that apply to FrameSaver units Appendix A Menu Hierarchy Contains a graphical representation of how the user interface screens are organized Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Identifies the MIBs supported and how they can be downloaded describes the unit s compliance with SNMP format standards and with its special operational trap features and describes the RMON specific user history groups and alarm and event defaults Appendix C Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Shows the rear panel tells what cables are needed and provides pin assignments for interfaces and cables Appendix D Technical Specifications Appendix E Equipment List Index Lists key terms acronyms concepts and sections A master glossary of terms and acronyms used in Paradyne documents is available on the World Wide Web at www paradyne com Select Library gt Technical Manuals Technical Glossary viii May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 About This Guide Product Related Documents Document Number Document Title Paradyne FrameSaver FLEX Documentation 9123 A2 GN10 FrameSaver FLEX 9123 Installation Instructions 9123 A2 GL10 FrameSaver FLEX 9123 Quick Referen
243. rk MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag frFrExtDiciNetDropFr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 23 1 D Missing Latency Responses MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciMissedSLVs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 6 1 D Congested Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDliciStsCongestedSecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 2 1 D Inactive Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciStsInactiveSecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 5 1 D Average Latency MIB pdn FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyAvg B 28 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 15 Alarm OID Cross Reference 2 of 2 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 7 1 D 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 2 1 N 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 3 1 N 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 6 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 7 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 11 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 14 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 15 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 16 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 17 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 18 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 19 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 20 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 28 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 29 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 32 1 9123 A2 GB20 00 Current Latency Frame Size Upper Limits 1 5 Frame Size Count
244. rk further enhancing the accuracy of OpenLane SLV reports See OpenLane SLM System for additional information 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 1 7 About the FrameSaver FLEX 9123 OpenLane SLM System 1 8 Being standards based the OpenLane SLM Service Level Management system can be used with other management applications like HP OpenView or IBM s NetView OpenLane includes HP OpenView adapters for integrating OpenLane features with the OpenView Web interface Being Web based the OpenLane system provides Web access to the data contained in the database to provide anytime anywhere access to this information via a Web browser Some of the OpenLane system s features include Real time performance graphs provide exact performance measurement details not averages which can skew performance results of service level agreement SLA parameters Historical SLV graphs provide service level management historical reports so frame relay SLAs can be verified Diagnostic troubleshooting provides an easy to use tool for performing tests which include end to end PVC loopback connectivity and physical interface tests Basic configuration allows you to configure FrameSaver devices and set RMON alarms and thresholds Network DLCI Circuit IDs can also be assigned Automatic SLV device and PVC discovery allows all SLV devices with their SLV Delivery Ratio configuration option enabled to be discovered automatically along with their PV
245. ry Grenada51 DLCI 301 File View Format NetScout Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 Interval 60 Seconds 11 28 17 11 29 16 11 30 16 Wed Oct 21 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 10 301 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 5 10 301 6 1 4 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 10 301 E i 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 4 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 10 301 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 18 10 301 3 Click to Zoom Out 8 Click anywhere on this window to return to the previous window view see Step 7 of this procedure Refer to Launching User History and Understanding Custom History Display in Using Custom History of the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional information See Object ID Cross References Numeric Order in Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Default to identify OID information being shown May 2000 8 15 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus Once the FrameSaver FLEX agent has been added to NetScout Manager Plus select either the Traffic or Protocol radio button to monitor the newly added agent or one of its DLC Is NOTE Only the Traffic and Protocol radio buttons on the application selection bar are supported for FrameSaver FLEX agents The procedure that follows describes how to monitor an agent s traffic The procedure is the same for protocol monitoring but you may be prompted to select a Domain Group as well as
246. s NOTE The router must be configured to receive RIP on the port connected to the FrameSaver unit for the management interface e g Cisco config t router RIP int serialx IP RIP Receive version 1 ct1 z WR See Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP 3 48 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Configuring General SNMP Management Select General SNMP Management to add change or delete the information needed to allow the FrameSaver unit to be managed as an SNMP agent by the NMS supporting the SNMP protocols see Table 3 11 Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management You must have Level 1 access to display or configure these options Table 3 11 General SNMP Management Options 1 of 2 SNMP Management Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the FrameSaver unit can be managed as an SNMP agent by an SNMP compatible NMS Enable Can be managed as an SNMP agent Disable Cannot be managed as an SNMP agent The FrameSaver unit will not respond to SNMP messages nor send SNMP traps Community Name 1 Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Public in ASCII text field Specifies the first of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the FrameSaver unit s MIB The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB ASCII text en
247. s IP address in its routing table so it can communicate with the FrameSaver unit Verify that the central site NMS has been configured as an SNMP Trap Manager if the router is to route data so a route has been configured within the FrameSaver unit Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication gt SNMP Traps Or for a local DLCI between the central site FrameSaver unit and its router verify that a Default IP Destination route has been configured Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt Node IP Default IP Destination Configure both SNMP Traps and a Default IP Destination when PVC Multiplexing is used as when using the Auto Configuration feature Select the IP Ping test Main Menu 5 Test gt IP Ping Enter the IP Address of the central site NMS then select Start Verify the results of the IP Ping test While the test is running In Progress appears in the Status field When the test is finished Alive Latency nn ms should appear as the Status nn being the amount of time the test took in milliseconds If any other message is displayed additional testing will be required May 2000 6 29 Troubleshooting Lamp Test 6 30 The FrameSaver unit supports a Lamp Test to verify that all LEDs are lighting and functioning properly All LEDs flash or blink on and off at the same time every 1 2 second during execution of the test When the test is stopped the LEDs are restore
248. s chapter tells you how to access use and navigate the menu driven user interface It includes the following Logging On Main Menu Screen Work Areas Navigating the Screens Keyboard Keys Function Keys Selecting from a Menu Switching Between Screen Areas Selecting a Field Entering Information What appears on the screens depends on 9123 A2 GB20 00 Current configuration How your network is currently configured Security access level The security level set by the system administrator for each user Data selection criteria What you entered in previous screens May 2000 2 1 User Interface and Basic Operation Logging On 2 2 Start a session using one of the following methods m Telnet session via An in band management channel through the frame relay network A local in band management channel configured on the DTE port between the FrameSaver unit and the router ALAN port m Dial in connection using an external modem Direct terminal connection over the COM port When logging on the User Interface Idle screen appears f no security was set up or security was disabled the Main Menu screen appears see Main Menu on page 2 4 You can begin your session f security was set up and is enabled you are prompted for a login Enter your login ID and password When the user interface has been idle a session is automatically ended and the screen goes bl
249. s needed to access the unit when the management PVC is providing connectivity to an external IP network through frame relay that requires a specific subnet mask for the interface Node Subnet Mask Uses the Interface IP Subnet contained in the Node Subnet Mask configuration option see Table 3 9 Node IP Options Calculate Calculates the subnet mask created by the IP protocol based on the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 Cannot be displayed or edited Special 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Allows you to edit display the subnet mask for the management PVC when the subnet mask is different for this interface A text field displays where you can enter the subnet mask for this unit s management PVC Set DE Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether frames packets sent on a management PVC have the Discard Eligible DE bit set This bit is used by the network to prioritize which frames to discard first during periods of network congestion This allows management traffic to be viewed as lower priority than customer data Enable Sets the DE bit to one on all frames sent on the management PVC Disable Sets the DE bit to zero on all frames sent on the management PVC This is the recommended setting particularly for NSPs providing a managed network service Primary Link Possible Settings Net1 FR1 Por
250. s that integrate FrameSaver SLV enhanced performance statistics into its reporting package see the FrameSaver SLV report example on page 9 9 To get this report you need Network Health R4 01 or higher This chapter includes Network Health information as it relates to FrameSaver FLEX devices It includes the following 9123 A2 GB20 00 Installation and Setup of Network Health and reports Discovering FrameSaver Elements Configuring the Discovered Elements Grouping Elements for Reports Generating Reports for a Group About Service Level Reports About At a Glance Reports About Trend Reports Printed Reports Reports Applicable to FLEX and SLV Devices May 2000 9 1 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices For additional information about installing accessing and managing FrameSaver FLEX devices through Concord s Network Health and for information about applicable reports refer to Network Health Installation Guide to help you install the application Network Health User Guide to help you get started using the application Network Health Reports Guide to help you understand and use Frame Relay reports Network Health Traffic Accountant Reports Guide to help you understand and use Traffic Accountant reports Installation and Setup of Network Health Refer to the Network Health Installation Guide for installation instructions and follow the instructions applicable to your network platform
251. sfer files to the unit not from it See Upgrading System Software Wait until message clears No action is needed Command takes longer than 5 seconds The port is disabled or it supports synchronous data and is configured for leased line mode when a DTE Loopback was started Yes or y was entered in No action is needed the Reset COM Port usage field of the System Paused menu May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 9123 A2 GB20 00 Table 5 5 Device Messages 5 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do Changes were made on the No action is needed Save Cancelled Test Active User Interface Already in Use User Interface Idle Value Out of Range Easy Install screen but when it came to saving the changes the Esc key was pressed or No was entered in response to the Save Changes prompt No higher priority health and status messages exist and a test is running Two Telnet sessions are already in use when an attempt to access the menu driven user interface through the COM port is made IP addresses and logins of the users currently accessing the interface are also provided Previously active session is now closed ended and access via the COM port is now available Session has been ended due to timeout CIR entered for the DLCI is a number greater than the maximum allowed Excess Burst Size entered for the DLCI is a number greater than the maximum allowed DLCI Number
252. sical from the Data Ports menu to configure the physical characteristics for the user data port see Table 3 5 Main Menu Configuration Data Ports Physical Table 3 5 Data Port Physical Interface Options 1 of 2 Invert Transmit Clock Possible Settings Auto Enable Disable Default Setting Auto Determines whether the clock supplied by the FrameSaver unit on interchange circuit DB ITU 114 Transmit Signal Element Timing DCE Source TXC is phase inverted with respect to the clock used to time the incoming Transmitted Data TD Auto The port will check the clock supplied by the DCE on TXC on this port If necessary the port will automatically phase invert the clock with respect to the transmitted data Enable Phase inverts the TXC clock Use this setting when long cable lengths between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE are causing data errors Disable Does not phase invert the TXC clock Transmit Clock Source Possible Settings Internal External Default Setting Internal Determines whether the DTE s transmitted data is clocked into the FrameSaver unit by its internal transmit clock or by the external clock provided by the DTE NOTE Changing settings for this configuration option causes the FrameSaver unit to abort any physical port tests including any DTE initiated loopback tests Internal The FrameSaver unit uses the interchange circuit DB ITU 114 Transmit Signal Element Timing TXC DCE
253. software has detected that the primary clock source has failed String Primary clock failed Operating software has detected that the primary clock source Is operational again String Primary clock restored All RMON related option changes have been reset to their default values Default Factory Configuration settings have been reloaded returning RMON related options to their original settings String RMON database reset to defaults Unit has completed re initialization and a hardware failure was detected String Self test failed s s is the contents of devSelfTestResult 9123 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 7 enterprise Specific Traps and Variable Bindings 3 of 3 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause enterprise Test For physical interfaces and At least one test has been Start 5 frame relay links started on an interface or virtual iflndex REC 1573 vee String 0 0 placeholder testString test started on m devLastTrapString SifString e g DTE Loopback devHealthAndStatus test started on Sync Data Port mib S01P1 For virtual circuits DLCls enterprise Test All tests have been halted on an Stop 105 devFrExtDicilflndex interface or virtual circuit devFrExt mib String m devFrExtDiciDici testString test stopped on devFrExt mib ifString e g Disruptive PVC Loopback test stopp
254. son can be up to 255 characters Date Current date in the month day year format mm dd yyyy Time Current time in the hours minutes format hh mm NOTE To clear existing information place the cursor in the Clear field Tab to the Clear field and press Enter See Chapter 4 Security and Logins to set up and administer logins 3 10 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Setting Up Auto Configuration The auto configuration feature allows you to select a method of automatic configuration and connection of DLCls within the FrameSaver unit as well as to automatically remove DLCls and connections that are no longer supported by the network service provider When operating in Frame Relay mode the auto configuration feature maintains associated DLCI option settings when Standard LMI is used on the network interface Main Menu Auto Configuration Auto Configuration Screen Example main auto configuration 9123 C SLV Device Name Node A 1 24 2000 23 32 AUTO CONF IGURATION Frame Relay Discovery Mode 1MPort Automatic Circuit Removal Enable Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Save 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 11 Configuration Selecting a Frame Relay Discovery Mode When a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is active the FrameSaver unit discovers network DLCls from the network LMI status response message It configures a network DLCI a user data port DLCI and automatically connects th
255. splay or change the Frame Relay options for an individual interface see Table 3 6 Main Menu Configuration Network Data Ports Frame Relay To configure these options Service Type on the Easy Install screen must be set to Frame Relay See Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System for additional information Table 3 6 Interface Frame Relay Options 1 of 3 LMI Protocol Possible Settings Initialize From Net1FR1 Initialize From Interface Auto On LMI Fail Standard Annex A Annex D Default Setting For a user data port link Initialize From Interface For a network link Auto On LMI Fail Specifies either the LMI protocol supported on the frame relay interface or the discovery source for the LMI protocol Initialize From Net1FR1 The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured to match the LMI protocol initially discovered on the primary Network frame relay link Net1FR1 LMI Protocol is set to None internally but once a protocol has become active or is set on the primary Network link the protocol will be set to the same value on this link Standard Annex A or Annex D The protocol will not be updated based on changes to Net1FR1 after being set initially Display Conditions This option value only appears for a user data port Initialize From Interface The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured to match the LMI protocol discovered from the attached Network line or DTE
256. ssociated with the link will be deleted If a deleted management PVC was also an Initial Route Destination see Table 3 14 SNMP Traps Options or a Default IP Destination these options are reset to their default settings 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 45 Configuration Configuring Management PVCs 3 46 Select Management PVCs to define inband management links by adding or changing Management PVCs see Table 3 10 First DLCI records must have been configured for the interface where the Management PVC will reside See Manually Configuring DLCI Records for additional information Main Menu Configuration s Management and Communication gt Management PVCs Select New or Modify to add or change Management PVCs m When you select New the configuration option field is blank m When you select Modify the values displayed for all fields are based on the PVC ID number that you specified These options do not apply when the Management PVC is designated as a TS Access Management Link see Configuring Node IP Information for additional information From this screen you can go directly to the PVC Connections screen by selecting the PVCConn function key for easy movement between screens Select the Delete function key a Management PVC ID and respond Yes to the Remove otherwise unused components associated with the deleted PVC prompt for quick removal of unused DLCls If the Management PVC selected is defined as a trap Initial Route
257. t Status System and Test Status Table 6 1 Alarm Conditions 1 of 4 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do AIS at Network 1 For the network interface report the problem to your T1 service provider An Alarm Indication Signal AIS is being received by the interface AIS is an unframed all ones signal Check DTR and RTS from Port 1 The CTS control lead on the device s interface is off CTS down to Port 1 Device m Verify that the port is enabled m Check DTR from the user data port DLCI nnnn Down The DLCI for the specified Verify that the network LMI is up frame relay link 1 2 frame relay link is down If it is contact your network service provider DTR Down from The DTR control lead on Examine the attached DTE and Port 1 Device the device connected to the cable connected to the system s specified port is off This port message applies to data ports that act as DCEs Check that the port cable is securely attached at both ends Check the status of the attached equipment EER at Network 1 The error rate of the Verify that the network cable is received network signal securely attached at the exceeds the currently network interface configured threshold This condition only occurs if the network interface is configured for ESF framing Contact your network provider This condition clears when the error rate falls below th
258. t were above the excess information rate and were dropped m Above EIR Inbound Dropped Characters m Above CIR m Within CIR m Between CIR amp EIR m Above EIR Latest RdTrip Latency Avg RdTrip Latency Max RdTrip Latency in transit Total number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were dropped in transit The counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached 232 2 then the count starts over The SLV Delivery Ratio option see Table 3 2 Service Level Verification Options must be enabled for these statistics to appear NA appears instead of a statistical count if FDR DDR Frame Delivery Ratio Data Delivery Ratio information is not being received from the far end device m The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were above the committed information rate and were dropped in transit m The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were within within the committed information rate but were dropped in transit m The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate and were dropped in transit m The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were above the excess information rate and were dropped in transit Current round trip latency measured in milliseconds between the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI
259. t 1 Clear Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface to use for this management PVC The interface selected must have at least one DLCI or DLCI with EDLCI defined which is not part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC Net1 FR1 Specifies that the network interface be used in the connection Port 1 Specifies that the frame relay link on the user data port be used in the connection Clear Clears the link and the DLCI field and suppresses the EDLCI field if the DLCI was multiplexed 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 47 Configuration Table 3 10 Management PVC Options 3 of 3 Primary DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the DLC number used for the management PVC after the frame relay interface is selected The DLCI must be defined for the link i e has a DLCI record and it must not be part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconfigured for the DLCI NOTES DLCI cannot be entered if the Link field is blank Clearing the Link also clears the DLCI 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI number inclusive Primary EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the EDLCI number used for a management PVC when a multiplexed DLCI is selected EDLC Is identify individual connections
260. ted and received signals on the T1 network interface D4 Uses D4 framing format NOTE This setting is not recommended by network carriers False yellow alarms may occur after traffic has been running and the channel returns to idle or when there is light traffic when other settings are selected ESF format does not create this problem ESF Uses Extended Superframe framing format Line Coding Format Possible Settings AMI B8ZS Default Setting B8ZS Specifies the line coding format for the network interface re S O AMI Uses Alternate Mark Inversion AMI line coding format B8ZS Uses Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS line coding format Line Build Out LBO Possible Settings 0 0 7 5 15 22 5 Default Setting 0 0 Specifies the line build out for the signal transmitted to the network 0 0 7 5 15 22 5 Specifies line build out in dB May 2000 3 23 Configuration Table 3 4 Network Physical Interface Options 2 of 4 Bit Stuffing Possible Settings 62411 Disable Default Setting 62411 Determines the type of bit insertion to provide ones density requirements for data transmitted to the network Display Conditions This option does not appear when Line Coding Format is set to B8ZS 62411 Inserts a one in the data after 15 consecutive zeros are received or the density of ones falls below 12 5 This setting complies with AT amp T TR 62411 but is not recommended for fra
261. the Communication Port s Port Use option is set to Net Link see Table 3 3 General System Options Level 2 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information and run tests only they cannot change configuration options Level 3 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information only they cannot change configuration options or run tests Inactivity Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether a Telnet session is disconnected after a specified period of keyboard inactivity Enable Terminates the session after the Disconnect Time expires Disable Does not terminate Telnet session during inactivity 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 51 Configuration Table 3 12 Telnet and FTP Session Options 3 of 3 Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1 60 Default Setting 10 Sets the amount of keyboard inactive time allowed before a user session is disconnected Display Conditions This option does not appear when Inactivity Timeout is disabled 1 60 Up to an hour can be set FTP Session Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the system responds as a server when an FTP file transfer protocol client on an interconnected IP network requests an FTP session This option must be
262. the system LMI options or to set specific LMI options for this interface System Use system LMI options see Table 3 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options Custom Use the following options in this table to configure LMI parameters LMI Error Event N2 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 3 Configures the LMI defined N2 parameter which sets the number of errors that can occur on the LMI link before an error is reported Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies the maximum number of errors LMI Clearing Event N3 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 1 Configures the LMI defined N3 parameter which sets the number of error free messages that must be received before clearing an error event Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies how many error free messages it will take to clear the error event LMI Status Enquiry N1 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 255 Default Setting 6 Configures the LMI defined N1 parameter which sets the number of status enquiry polling cycles that the user side of the LMI initiates before a full status enquiry is initiated Applies to the user side of a UNI only 1 255 Specifies the number of status enquiry polling cycles that can be initiated before a full status enquiry is initiated LMI Heartbeat T1 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Defau
263. thernet Port Connector The following table provides the pin assignments for the FrameSaver unit s 8 position RJ45 Ethernet port unkeyed modular jack Signal Direction Pin 10BaseT Transmit Data TD To LAN Interface Out 10BaseT Transmit Data TD To LAN Interface Out 10BaseT Receive Data RD From LAN Interface In 10BaseT Receive Data RD From LAN Interface In 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 C 7 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments C 8 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Technical Specifications 9123 A2 GB20 00 Table D 1 FrameSaver FLEX 9123 Technical Specifications 1 of 2 Specification Criteria Approvals FCC Part 15 Class A digital device FCC Part 68 Refer to the equipment s label for the Registration Number Industry Canada Refer to the equipment s label for the Certification Number Safety Refer to the equipment s label for safety information Physical Environment Operating temperature 32 F to 122 F 0 C to 50 C Storage temperature 4 F to 158 F 20 C to 70 C Relative humidity 5 to 85 noncondensing Shock and vibration Withstands normal shipping and handling Power Consumption and 4 5 watts 60 Hz 3 0 135 A at 120 Vac 12 Dissipation Result 15 4 Btu per hour Physical Dimensions Height with feet 2 1 inches 5 3 cm Height without feet 2 0 inches 5 1 cm Width 6 2 inches 15 7 cm Depth 8 7 inches 22 1 cm Weight 1 38 lbs 0 62 kg May 2
264. thernet port Port 1 V 35 connector T1 line interface cable T1 network cable 9123 A2 GB20 00 Index Ping test 6 28 PLB Policing Tratfic Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks Access Level 3 60 4 3 assigning port to network time slots assignment clearing bursting communication options connector pin assignments control leads Ethernet connector pin assignments Ethernet interface status LED 5 6 Use 3 58 Primary Frame Relay Link Link RIP Primary Clock Failed 5 16 6 10 Source 3 22 printed reports problem indicators product related documents Proprietary RIP 3 48 3 55 Protocol address resolution 1 4 3 58 LMI Routing Information RIP 3 48 3 61 Simple Network Management SNMP Proxy ARP PVC availability connection status 5 20 connections 3 40 total number Loopback 6 18 Management 3 46 total number dedicated name 3 43 8 44 3 55 tests 6 17 troubleshooting problems May 2000 IN 7 Index Q quality of service Quick Reference R ratios FDR and DDR rear panel remote loopbacks 6 24 Repeater Loopback reports Network Health 9 7 reset last time 5 13 resetting statistics the unit 6 3 unit default configuration options restoring communication with a misconfigured unit retrieving statistics Return Enter key 2 7 revision software and hardware RFC 1213 and 1573 RFC 1315 R
265. try Adds to or changes Community Name 1 maximum 255 characters Clear Clears Community Name 1 Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Write Specifies the type of access allowed to the objects in the MIB This is the type of access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects using Community Name 1 Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP get and set commands Community Name 2 Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Clear Specifies the second of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the FrameSaver unit s MIB The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB ASCII text entry Adds to or changes Community Name 2 maximum 255 characters Clear Clears Community Name 2 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 49 Configuration Table 3 11 General SNMP Management Options 2 of 2 Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Specifies the type of access allowed to the objects in the MIB This is the type of access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects using Community Name 2 Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in t
266. ttings 1 65535 Default Setting Read Only Displays the DLCs calculated value of its committed rate measurement interval Tc in milliseconds This value is calculated based upon the settings for the Committed Burst Size Bc Bits and CIR bps options Committed Burst Size Bc Bits Possible Settings CIR Other Default Setting CIR Specifies whether the DLCI s committed burst size will follow the CIR or whether it will be entered independently This value is the maximum amount of data that the service provider has agreed to accept during the committed rate measurement interval Tc CIR Uses the value in the CIR bps option as the committed burst size Bc The Bc and excess burst size Be options are updated when a CIR update is received from the network switch Other Allows you to specify the committed burst size for the DLC When Other is selected the Bc and Be values must be manually entered and maintained as well Possible Settings O 1536000 Default Setting 64000 Allows you to display or change the DLCI s committed burst size Display Conditions This option only appears when Committed Burst Size is set to Other 0 1536000 Specifies the DLCI s committed burst size Excess Burst Size Bits Specifies the maximum amount of data in bits that the network may accept beyond the CIR without discarding frames Possible Settings 0 1536000 Default Setting 1472000 Allows you to dis
267. twork interface Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port 5 14 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 7 Health and Status Messages 2 of 3 Message What It Indicates Ethernet Link Down The Ethernet port is enabled but communication between the management system and the unit is not currently possible on the port Lease Line Mode Active The FrameSaver unit is configured for leased line operation see Service Type on the Easy Install screen Link Down Administratively The specified frame relay link has been disabled frame relay link by the unit due to LMI Behavior conditions or LMI Protocol on another link is in a failed state This is not an alarm condition so System Operational appears as well LMI Discovery in Progress Local Management Interface protocol discovery is frame relay link in progress to determine which protocol will be used on the specified frame relay link LMI Down frame relay link 2 The Local Management Interface s has been declared down for the specified frame relay link LOS at Network 1 A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the network interface Clears when the ratio of ones to zeros received is greater than or equal to 12 5 Possible reasons include Network cable problem m No signal is being transmitted at the far end FrameSaver unit m 11 facility problem Network Com Link Down The communication link for the C
268. twork performance statistics only Loss of Frame Count The number of Loss of Frame conditions LOFC Worst Interval The largest number of seconds for either ES UAS SES BES or CSS or the greatest Loss of Frame Count LOFC If more than one interval contains the same worst value then the oldest interval is displayed 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 5 37 Operation and Maintenance Ethernet Performance Statistics The following statistics appear when Ethernet is selected from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics Ethernet Statistic What It Indicates Port Rate Mbps The operating rate as detected on the Ethernet port One of the following may appear for this statistic m Disconnected The line is not connected 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps The Ethernet port is operating at this rate Disabled The Ethernet port has been disabled The duplex mode detected on the Ethernet port One of the following may appear for this statistic m Disconnected The line is not connected m Full The Ethernet port is operating in full duplex mode 4 wire Half The Ethernet port is operating in half duplex mode 2 wire m Disabled The Ethernet port has been disabled Frames Transmitted The number of successfully transmitted frames on the port Frames Received The number of frames received on the port Errored Frames The number of errors detected on the port Possible
269. u linkDown One or more alarm conditions are active on the interface Alarm conditions include Loss of Signal LOS or far end loss of signal Out of Frame OOF Alarm Indication Signal AIS Excessive Error Rate EER Yellow Alarm Strings ifString down No alarms exist e g Network T1 down due to yellow alarm ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown linkUp No alarms on the interface String ifString up linkDown One or more alarm conditions are active on the port Alarm conditions include DTR off 1 RTS off 2 Not DTR or RTS but link is down String ifString SalarmString down e g Sync Data Port S01P1 DTR and RTS down ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown linkUp No alarms on the port String SifString up 1 The DTR alarm condition will only generate a linkUp linkDown trap if the DTE supports the DTR lead state 2 The RTS alarm condition will only generate a linkUp linkDown trap if the DTE supports the RTS lead state 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 B 9 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 6 linkUp and linkDown Variable Bindings 2 of 2 Interface Variable Bindings Possible Cause Physical Sublayer cont d Ethernet Port ifIndex RFC 1573 a linkDown Communication is B 10 Logical L
270. ur browser or NMS manual for additional download information May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults System Group mib 2 This section provides the system description and system object identifier for the System Group for the FrameSaver 9123 unit which is an SNMPv1 MIB FrameSaver Unit s sysDescr system 1 The following is the system description sysDescr system 1 for the NMS subsystem in the FrameSaver 9123 unit PARADYNE T1 FrameSaver Flex Model 9123 9123 C S W Release MM mm bb MM Major mm minor bb build format NAM CCA number hardware version in hhhh hhh format Serial number sssssss FrameSaver Unit s sysObjectID system 2 The following is the system object identifier sysObjectID system 2 or OID for the NMS subsystem in the FrameSaver 9123 unit 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 4 11 1 for the basic FLEX feature set or 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 4 11 2 for the advanced FLEX SLV feature set NOTE The sysObjectID will be 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 4 11 1 basic until it is upgraded via the OpenLane SLM system 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 B 3 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Interfaces Group mib 2 Clarification for objects in the Interfaces Group as defined in RFC 1573 and RFC 1213 which is an SNMPv1 MIB is provided in this section Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table if Table The following table provides the ifName for each interface type the
271. uration options in the m FrameSaver FLEX 9123 Quick Reference Configuration Option Tables If the factory default settings do not support your network s configuration you can customize the configuration options to better suit your application Four configuration option storage areas are available Configuration Option Area Description Current Configuration The currently active set of configuration options Customer Configuration 1 An alternate set of configuration options that the customer can set up and store for future use Customer Configuration 2 Another alternate set of configuration options that the customer can set up and store for future use Default Factory Configuration A read only configuration area containing the factory default set of configuration options You can load and edit default factory configuration settings but you can only save those changes to the Current Customer 1 or Customer 2 configuration option areas The Current Customer 1 and Customer 2 configuration option areas are identical to the Default Factory Configuration until modified by the customer 3 4 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options 9123 A2 GB20 00 To access and display configuration options load copy the applicable configuration option set into the edit area B Procedure To load a set of configuration options for editing le From the Main Menu press the down
272. ure routing information is passed to the router over the management PVC so the router can learn routes to FrameSaver FLEX and SLV devices Node IP information should be set up see Configuring Node IP Information B Procedure 1 Configure the router to receive RIP For example if using a Cisco router configure config t router RIP int serialx IP RIP Receive version 1 thenct1 z WR 2 Create a Standard DLCI for the user data port Configuration Data Ports DLCI Records 3 Create a Management PVC using the user data port DLCI just configured Configuration Management and Communication Management PVCs 4 Set Primary Link RIP to Standard Out and Save the configuration Refer to Table 3 7 DLC Record Options and Table 3 10 Management PVC Options for configuration information Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock Select System Information to set up or display the general SNMP name for the unit its location and a contact for the unit as well as to set the system clock Main Menu Control System Information The following information is available for viewing Save any entries or changes If the selection is Enter the Device Name Unique name for device identification of up to 20 characters System Name SNMP system name can be up to 255 characters System Location System s physical location can be up to 255 characters System Contact Name and how to contact the system per
273. val Only one alarm per event per interval is generated The alarm condition persists until the event has been disarmed reset The event is disarmed when a falling threshold has been crossed and the rising threshold has not been crossed during an interval allowing the event to return to its original disarmed state May 2000 B 15 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Physical Interface Alarm Defaults This alarm only applies to the FrameSaver unit s network interface Table B 9 Network Physical Interface Alarm Defaults Rising Falling Threshold Threshold MIB Tag OID Interval Default Default 900 secs 15 mins MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devTelcoFreeRunUAS OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 5 4 8 1 2 1 Unavailable Seconds 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB 2 Lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link B 16 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults Table B 10 Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults 1 of 2 Invalid Frames Short Frames Long Frames Rx Discards Tx Discards Rx Total Errors MIB Tag OID 2 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxIlFrames OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 18 1 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxShort OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7
274. ving data errors on a multiplexed DLCI but frame relay is okay Possible Cause Login or password is incorrect COM port is misconfigured or the unit is otherwise configured so it prevents access The unit has detected an internal software failure LED is burned out Network cable loose or broken Frame Relay Discovery is being used for automatic DLCI and PVC configuration The equipment at the other end is not frame relay RFC 1490 compliant May 2000 Solutions Reset the unit see Restoring Communication with a Misconfigured Unit Contact your service representative Record the 8 digit code from the System and Test Status screen Reset the unit and try again Contact your service representative and provide the 8 digit failure code Run the Lamp Test If the LED in question does not flash with the other LEDs then contact your service representative Reconnect or repair the cable Call the network service provider Change the DLCI Type for each network DLCI from Multiplexed to Standard turning off multiplexing 9123 A2 GB20 00 Troubleshooting Frame Relay PVC Problems 9123 A2 GB20 00 Table 6 3 Frame Relay PVC Problems Symptom Possible Cause Solutions Cross Connection of the Verify the PVC connections DLCls are configured and DLCls by checking the incorrectly network discovered DLCls on the LMI Reported DLCls screen No receipt or transmission of
275. wever you can retrieve the data file for the user history reports regardless of access level You cannot put a configuration file to the factory cfg or current cfg files under the system directory Configuration files should be put to a customer file cust1 cfg or cust2 cfg then loaded into the downloaded unit s Current Configuration via the menu driven user interface m You can only put a NAM program file nam ocd into a FrameSaver unit You cannot get a program file from the FrameSaver unit to a host Before putting a download file you must use the bin binary command to place the data connection in binary transfer mode m When transferring SLV user history information to the NMS you can only get a uhbcfull dat file It is recommended that you use the NMS application to get this information see Transferring Collected Data A data file uhbcfull dat or Imitrace syc cannot be put into a FrameSaver node LMI packet capture data Imitrace syc is not readable when the LMI Packet Capture Utility is active The SLV user history file is only available to units with the FLEX SLV feature set FrameSaver SLV units provide an additional feature that allows new software to be downloaded in the background using the selected bandwidth and without interfering with normal operation Downloads can be performed quickly using the full line speed or at a slower rate over an extended period of time You initiate an FTP session to a F
276. y Destination Link DLCls Available No Security Records to Delete Password Matching Error Re enter Password Permission Denied Seen at an FTP terminal Please Wait Port Inactive Resetting Device Please Wait 5 10 New or Modify was selected from the PVC Connection Table but even though DLCls are available to form a connection no DLCls are available on the network link which is a suitable Primary PVC Destination Configure additional DLCls for the network link and try again If a network DLCI has been entered as a Source DLCI 1 Change the Source DLCI to a user data port DLCI Enter the network DLCI as the PVC s Primary Destination Delete was selected from No action is needed the Administer Login screen and no security records had been defined Enter a security record Password entered in the Re enter Password field of the Administer Logins screen does not match what was entered in the Password field Try again Contact your system administrator to verify your password A file transfer was attempted but the User did not have Level 1 security See your system administrator to get your security level changed Wrong file was specified when the put command was entered Try again entering the correct file with the put command User attempted to upload a program file from the unit Enter the put command instead of a get command you can only tran
277. y and correct domains and groups Monitor the agent and DLCls Refer to the NetScout documentation for additional information about accessing and managing the FrameSaver unit through NetScout Manager Plus refer to the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide to help you install the application monitor traffic and diagnose emerging problems on network segments NetScout Manager Plus 8 NetScout Server Administrator Guide to help you configure agents remote servers and report templates using the various NetScout products NetScout Probe User Guide to help you install the NetScout Probe between the FrameSaver unit and its router and configure the probe on network segments you want to monitor May 2000 8 3 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Adding FrameSaver FLEX Units to the NetScout Manager Plus Network B gt Procedure 1 2 Bring up the NetScout Manager Plus main window Select the FrameRelay radio button from the agent type selection bar on the left side of the window File w Agent wr AgentGroup w Switch FrameRel ay A list of configured frame relay agents appear in the list box below the Name and IP Address headings If this is a new NetScout Manager Plus installation the list box below the selection bar is blank since no agents are configured yet Select the Admin radio button from the application selection bar to the far right of the screen Applicable configuration and administration icons
278. y discovered and configured DLCls or cross connections will be removed unless authorized or Automatic Circuit Removal is enabled see Automatically Removing a Circuit Additional discovered DLCls will be configured according to the current Frame Relay Discovery Mode setting Selecting or changing the setting will not affect IP Addresses or Subnet Masks NOTE When auto configuration creates a multiplexed DLCI but a standard DLCI is needed change the DLCI to standard from the network DLC Records screen Configuration Network DLCI Records 9123 A2 GB20 00 May 2000 3 13 Configuration When a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is changed and saved the Saving will cause Auto Configuration to update and Restart Are you sure prompt appears No is the default for this prompt If Yes y is entered the Delete All DLCIs and PVC Connections prompt appears No is the default for this prompt lf Yes is entered all multiplexed DLCIs and PVC Connections are deleted except for Management PVCs with the user data port as the primary destination and the Management PVC that is designated as TS Management Link lf No is entered previously discovered and auto configured option settings will not be removed but configuration updates due to LMI response messages are performed according to the just saved mode setting If No n is entered or if you exit the screen without responding to the prompt no Auto Configuration updates are performed
279. y information LEDs and control leads DLCI deletion Destination 3 41 Down 5 14 6 7 on SLV Timeout LMI reported status monitoring user history Number 3 37 Priority 3 39 Records 3 37 Source 3 40 Statistics status 5 18 Traps on Interfaces Type 3 37 download downloading determining when completed MIBs and SNMP traps SLV alarms software 5 40 user history file 9123 A2 GB20 00 Index DTE Loopback port connector pin assignments port initiated loopbacks DTLB DTR control lead down down from Port 1 Device Ignore Control Leads E EDLCI Destination 3 41 Source 3 40 EER at Network 5 14 6 7 LED 5 4 5 5 linkDown trap EIA 232C COM Port connector EIR enforcement statistics 5 29 elements DLCls Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCI 3 40 3 41 3 48 _ ending a session Enter Return key 2 7 entering system information 3 10 Enterprise Specific Traps 3 55 enterprise specific traps B 11 equipment list Error Event LMI 3 18 3 35 SLV Timeout Threshold Errors frame relay statistics Esc key ESF Line statistics Ethernet Initial Route Destination 3 55 Link Down 5 15 performance statistics port MAC address Ethernet port 3 43 connector pin assignments default gateway address options 3 57 May 2000 IN 3 Index even parity G Event Log Trap 5391
280. y1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save ClearAll Value Meaning Time Slot Specifies whether the time slots used for frame relay traffic should Discovery be discovered from the network interface upon detection of an LMI failure This option allows additional time slots to be added without manually reconfiguring the device This field represents time slot tt of the selected network interface Assigned The time slot is already assigned to something other than frame relay so it is unavailable Assigned time slots cannot be modified from this screen Available The time slot is currently unassigned FrameRly1 The time slot is assigned to frame relay service link 1 Time Slot Assignment Rule Valid network time slots are either Available or contain a frame relay link 1 assignment 3 30 May 2000 9123 A2 GB20 00 Configuration B Procedure 1 Select Frame Relay Network Assignments Main Menu Configuration Time Slot Assignment gt Frame Relay Network Assignments or Main Menu Easy Install gt Time Slot Assignment Screen When Service Type is set to Frame Relay the default The Frame Relay Network Assignments screen appears This screen contains a matrix of the current assignment status of all time slots on the network interface 2 Enable or disable Time Slot Discovery When enabled the unit exami

FrameSaver FLEX 9123 User's Guide - 9123-A2-GB20-00

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents